1. Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

Transcription

1 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Work by Owner. 5. Owner-furnished products. 6. Contractor-furnished, Owner-installed products. 7. Access to site. 8. Coordination with occupants. 9. Work restrictions. 10. Specification and drawing conventions. 11. Miscellaneous provisions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: PHASE 2 - Interior Renovations Orthopaedic Suite 7 th Floor Clinical Sciences Bldg (600) 1. Project Location: Medical University of South Carolina (MUSC) Charleston, SC B. Owner: Medical University of South Carolina (MUSC) 1. Owner's Representative: James Stewart Project Manager MUSC Engineering & Facilities 97 Jonathan Lucas Street MSC 190 Charleston, SC SUMMARY

2 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 C. Architect: 12-A Vanderhorst Street Charleston, SC Phone: D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1. MEP/FP: RMF Engineering 194 Seven Farms Drive, Suite G Charleston, SC Phone: WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. This project is an interior office renovation of approximately 4,000 SF on the 7 th floor of the Clinical Sciences building at the Medical University of South Carolina in Charleston, SC. The renovation includes selective demolition, modifications to the existing HVAC system, interior alterations, and installation of utilities to support revised office layout. 2. The renovation includes a portion of the 7 th floor. Area not included in project scope will remain occupied by MUSC staff for the duration of the construction. Contractor is responsible for maintaining code required exists throughout construction period. 3. Contractor B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. C. Schedule/Phasing: 1. Complete Card Access for Door HE708FL1 within 45 days of Notice to Proceed. 1.5 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS: A. NIC: Items noted NIC (Not in Contract) will be supplied and installed by the Owner. B. OFOI: Owner-furnished, Owner Installed. Owner will supply and install products indicated. C. OFCI: Owner-furnished, Contractor installed. Owner will supply indicated products and installed by the contractor. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing products. D. CFCI: Contractor Furnished, Contractor Installed. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing products. SUMMARY

3 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 E. Owner-Furnished Products: 1. Toilet Accessories: See Dwgs for scope and details 1.6 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated by requirements of this Section. C. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas where work is indicated. 2. Use of elevators and stairs is acceptable but elevators and stairs must be kept clean by the Contractor. The elevators and stairs must be usable by the building occupants. Construction materials and debris must be delivered and removed via the freight elevator or through the windows. 3. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. D. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weather tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 1.7 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's dayto-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. SUMMARY

4 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy. 3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work. 1.8 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. Noise restrictions may apply. 1. All work associated and located/performed within the CSB 6 th Floor to be scheduled after hours or on weekends. No work shall be performed on BSB 6 th Floor during normal business working hours. a. Weekend Hours: As approved and scheduled with Owner in advance. b. Early Morning Hours: As approved and scheduled with Owner in advance. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than five working days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. SUMMARY

5 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days (48 hours) in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is prohibited. Refer to and comply with Human Resources Management Policy 49 - Tobacco-free Campus and to MUSC Tobacco-Free Campus Map, both included in the appendix for reference. F. Controlled Substances: Use of controlled substances on Project site is not permitted. G. Employee Identification: Owner will supply identification badges for contractor personnel with appropriate application. Personnel must wear badges at all times while on campus. H. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site. 1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative. 1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) SUMMARY

6 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION SUMMARY

7 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Lump-sum allowances. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting. 2. Section Unit Prices for procedures using unit prices. 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. ALLOWANCES

8 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. 1.7 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site. B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials provided by Owner under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed. 1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. ALLOWANCES

9 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lowerpriced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. 1: Lump-Sum Allowance: Include the sum of $1,500 for fire stopping of existing conditions not adequately firestopped. 1. This allowance includes costs for material, labor, installation, receiving, handling, delivery, taxes, and Contractor overhead and profit. See also Division 1 Section Unit Prices. 2. Additional firestopping required to maintain or provide new ratings as a result of demolition work necessary to accommodate renovation. New work in the construction documents is to be provided independent of this allowance, in the base bid. END OF SECTION ALLOWANCES

10 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Includes: Provide alternative bid proposals as described in this Section. B. Related Documents: a. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and all applicable Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. C. Procedures: 1. Provide alternative bids to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in scope is accepted by the Owner. 2. Include within the alternative bid prices all costs, including materials, submittals, installation, and fees to provide a complete, operable and finished system. 3. Show the proposed alternative amounts opposite their proper description of the Bid Form. 4. See Plans and Subparagraph 1.1.E of this specification for a description of alternates. D. Alternates: 1. Definitions: Alternates are defined as alternate products, materials, equipment, installations or systems for the work, which may at the Owner s option and under terms established by Instructions to Bidders, be selected and recorded in the Contract (Owner- Contractor Agreement) to either supplement or displace corresponding basic requirements of contract documents. The Alternates are not in precise order of acceptance and may be accepted, rejected or deferred in any order. 2. Notification: Immediately following award of Contract, prepare and distribute to each entity to be involved in performance of the work, a notification of status of each alternate. Indicate which alternates have been: 1) Accepted, 2) Rejected, and 3) Deferred for consideration at a later date as indicated. Include full description of negotiated modifications to alternates, if any. ALTERNATES

11 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 OSE Project Number H51-D145-ID 3. Alternate prices may be held 90-days beyond contract acceptance. Alternate prices listed below shall be good for ninety (90) days beyond the date of contract acceptance. The Owner may accept or reject any or all alternates within the above stated time frame. E. Provide Alternate Bid Pricing for the following: a. ALTERNATE NO. 1 i. Base Bid: Base bid excludes all work associated with Existing Room HE705A1. ii. Alternate: Include 100 % of all demolition work and new work required to complete new Janitors Closet, HE7JA1. This includes all MEP/FP demolition and new work. (Note: If alternate is accepted, the room number will be revised from HE705A1 existing to HE7JA1 to comply with MUSC room no standards for Janitor s/support space.) b. ALTERNATE NO. 2 i. Base Bid: Provide 2 x 4 or 2 x 2 Fluorescent Light Fixture as indicated on electrical drawing and light fixture schedule. ii. Alternate: Provide 2 x 4 or 2 x 2 LED Light Fixture as indicated on electrical drawing and light fixture schedule in lieu of fluorescent fixture. c. ALTERNATE NO. 3: i. Base Bid: Bidder agrees to substantially complete work within 120 calendar days from the Date of Commencement. Final completion shall be 14 days from date of substantial completion. ii. Alternate: Bidder agrees to substantially complete work within 100 calendar days from the Date of Commencement. Final completion shall be 14 days from date of substantial completion. END OF SECTION ALTERNATES

12 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to award of the Contract, are included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided in Project Manual. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

13 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

14 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

15 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 10 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

16 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail or form acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request (Proposal)," with attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail" or form acceptable to Owner. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

17 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

18 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of allowances. 2. Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 3. Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. PAYMENT PROCEDURES

19 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each element. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance. 6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. PAYMENT PROCEDURES

20 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the day of the month indicated in the Agreement. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. 1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect. C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration. E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. PAYMENT PROCEDURES

21 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. F. Transmittal: Submit five signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner. H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconstruction conference. I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. PAYMENT PROCEDURES

22 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION PAYMENT PROCEDURES

23 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Requests for Information (RFIs). 3. Project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

24 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Key Personnel Names: Within 7 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, on Project Web site, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. C. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

25 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

26 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 5 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Software log with not less than the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within five days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

27 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Lines of communications. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of record documents. l. Use of the premises. m. Work restrictions. n. Working hours. o. Owner's occupancy requirements. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Procedures for moisture and mold control. r. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. s. Construction waste management and recycling. t. Parking availability. u. Office, work, and storage areas. v. Equipment deliveries and priorities. w. First aid. x. Security. y. Progress cleaning. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect and Owner of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

28 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. l. Manufacturer's written instructions. m. Warranty requirements. n. Acceptability of substrates. o. Temporary facilities and controls. p. Space and access limitations. q. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. r. Testing and inspecting requirements. s. Installation procedures. t. Coordination with other work. u. Required performance results. v. Protection of adjacent work. w. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 60 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

29 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. k. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. l. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

30 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

31 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Requirements: Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 3. Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. 2. Two paper copies. B. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

32 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. G. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. H. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. I. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. J. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

33 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 7 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 3. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Uninterruptible services. c. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. d. Use of premises restrictions. e. Provisions for future construction. f. Environmental control. 5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Submittals. b. Purchases. c. Mockups. d. Fabrication. e. Deliveries. f. Installation. g. Tests and inspections including startup and placement into final use and operation. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

34 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 h. Adjusting. 6. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Completion of mechanical installation. b. Completion of electrical installation. c. Substantial Completion. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. 2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. B. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established the Notice to Proceed. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

35 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time. C. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing. j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. D. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

36 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. 2.4 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. Accidents. 7. Meetings and significant decisions. 8. Unusual events (see special reports). 9. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 10. Meter readings and similar recordings. 11. Emergency procedures. 12. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 13. Change Orders received and implemented. 14. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 15. Services connected and disconnected. 16. Equipment or system tests and startups. 17. Partial completions and occupancies. 18. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

37 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: 1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage. C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

38 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

39 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values. 2. Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

40 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use during bidding, but will be available for reference in preparing submittals, provided the waiver form and processing fee are received by the Architect. See Appendix. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

41 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. 5. A fee of $500 shall be paid in advance to the Architect and or Architect s consultants per resubmittal for each and every submittal that require a third review. Each subsequent review after the third review shall be an additional $500. These fees shall not be charged back to the Owner. D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS ). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

42 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks. 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

43 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect's FTP site specifically established for Project. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Submit electronic submittals via as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 3. Action Submittals: Submit six paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 4. Informational Submittals: Submit four paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

44 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 b. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. Six paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. e. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

45 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Retain returned Sample set as a project record sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section "Construction Progress Documentation." F. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section "Payment Procedures." G. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section "Closeout Procedures." H. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. I. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

46 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 J. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. K. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. L. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. M. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. N. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. P. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. Q. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. R. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. S. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

47 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 T. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. END OF SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

48 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

49 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 1. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of three previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

50 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities. B. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 7 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule. B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review. D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following: 1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. 2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections." 3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents. E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

51 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 11. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 12. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Retain general requirements in "Permits, Licenses, and Certificates" Paragraph below. Specific submittals may be specified in other Sections. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

52 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

53 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. 1.9 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

54 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section "Submittal Procedures." D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

55 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar qualitycontrol services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's qualitycontrol plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

56 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

57 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if REFERENCES

58 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; 2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; 4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; 6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; 7. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); 8. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; 9. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; AGA - American Gas Association; AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); AI - Asphalt Institute; AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; ANSI - American National Standards Institute; AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; REFERENCES

59 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase APA - Architectural Precast Association; API - American Petroleum Institute; ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 26. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 27. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE). 30. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers; ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers); ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; ASTM - ASTM International; (American Society for Testing and Materials International); ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; (Formerly: American Wood- Preservers' Association); AWS - American Welding Society; AWWA - American Water Works Association; BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association); BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; BOCA - BOCA; (Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.); (See ICC). 48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation); CDA - Copper Development Association; CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; CFFA - Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.; CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; CGA - Compressed Gas Association; CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; CPA - Composite Panel Association; CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; REFERENCES

60 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase CSA - Canadian Standards Association; CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA). 69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; ECA - Electronic Components Association; ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECA). 73. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 74. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA). 78. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation); FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation); FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.; FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; GA - Gypsum Association; GANA - Glass Association of North America; GS - Green Seal; HI - Hydraulic Institute; HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI). 91. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM). 92. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA). 96. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC). 97. ICC - International Code Council; ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America); IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES) IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; REFERENCES

61 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA); ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society); ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA) ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association); ISO - International Organization for Standardization; ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA) ITU - International Telecommunication Union; KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA) LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; MCA - Metal Construction Association; MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; MIA - Marble Institute of America; MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (Formerly: Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association); MPI - Master Painters Institute; MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International); NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; NFPA - NFPA; (National Fire Protection Association); NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA) NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA) NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; REFERENCES

62 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; NSF - NSF International; (National Sanitation Foundation International); NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association); RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; SAE - SAE International; (Society of Automotive Engineers); SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; SDI - Steel Deck Institute; SDI - Steel Door Institute; SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association; SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE) SIA - Security Industry Association; SJI - Steel Joist Institute; SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; SRCC - Solar Rating and Certification Corporation; SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; STI - Steel Tank Institute; SWI - Steel Window Institute; SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; (Formerly: Tile Council of America); TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association; (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA) TMS - The Masonry Society; TPI - Truss Plate Institute; TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; REFERENCES

63 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase UBC - Uniform Building Code; (See ICC) UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; USAV - USA Volleyball; USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; WI - Woodwork Institute; (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California); WMMPA - Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (See MMPA) WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; WPA - Western Wood Products Association; C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.v.; 2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; 3. ICC - International Code Council; 4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; 2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; 3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology; 4. DOD - Department of Defense; 5. DOE - Department of Energy; 6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; 7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; 8. FG - Federal Government Publications; 9. GSA - General Services Administration; HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies Division; OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; SD - Department of State; TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; REFERENCES

64 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice; USP - U.S. Pharmacopeia; USPS - United States Postal Service; E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; 2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point; 3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS). 4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS). 5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point; a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; b. Available from General Services Administration; c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide; 6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD). 7. USAB - United States Access Board; 8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB). F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CBHF - State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic Appliance and Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; 2. CCR - California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code; 3. CDHS - California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH). 4. CDPH - California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; 5. CPUC - California Public Utilities Commission; 6. SCAQMD - South Coast Air Quality Management District; 7. TFS - Texas Forest Service; Forest Resource Development and Sustainable Forestry; REFERENCES

65 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION REFERENCES

66 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: If required, installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water Service from Existing System: Water form Owner s existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner s existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program. C. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

67 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flamespread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2. B. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. Coordinate with Owner for possible locations. 2.3 EQUIPMENT TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

68 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove as end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section Closeout Procedures. C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with fourstage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner s existing parking areas for construction personnel. B. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section "Execution." C. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. D. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner on a daily or as-used basis. Elevators shall be maintained to condition existing before initial use.. 1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. 3. The elevators must be usable by the building occupants. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

69 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 4. Construction materials and debris must be delivered and removed via the freight elevator. E. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner on a daily or as-used basis. Stairs shall be maintained to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. 2. The stairs must be usable by the building occupants. 3. Construction materials and debris must be delivered and removed via the freight elevator or through the windows. 3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Water Service: Connect to Owner s existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities to a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. C. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling as required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. D. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas. 1. Prior to commencing work, isolate HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings. a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas. b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped airfiltration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete. 2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dustproducing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dustcontainment devices. 3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filterequipped vacuum equipment. E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation as required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installation of for protecting installed construction form adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

70 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 completed installation or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. F. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner s existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching as required that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section "Summary." C. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum board with joints taped on occupied side and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side. 2. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies. 3. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. 5. Protect air-handling equipment. 6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

71 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

72 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 3. Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

73 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

74 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

75 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

76 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

77 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Installation of the Work. 3. Cutting and patching. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 4. Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building. 5. Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE EXECUTION

78 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate EXECUTION

79 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section "Project Management and Coordination." EXECUTION

80 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Lay out the Work using accepted practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. EXECUTION

81 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. EXECUTION

82 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section "Summary." F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall EXECUTION

83 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. EXECUTION

84 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls and Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section "Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION EXECUTION

85 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

86 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use and handle as follows: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. B. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage. 3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor. C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

87 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. 2. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor. 3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Metals: Separate metals by type. 1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length. 2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware. B. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners. 3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

88 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 2. Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

89 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittal specified in other Division 1 Sections, including project record documents, manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer s name and model number where applicable. 5. Submit changeover information related to Owner s occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 6. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 7. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 8. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

90 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Contractor. d. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

91 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

92 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. c. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. d. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. e. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. f. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. g. Remove labels that are not permanent. h. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. i. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. j. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. k. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. l. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. m. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls and Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

93 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

94 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Execution" for final property survey. 2. Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit one paper-copy set of marked-up record prints. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit (COLOR) PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and three sets of paper prints. 2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

95 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories and one paper copy of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous recordkeeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories and one paper copy of each submittal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. d. Revisions to electrical circuitry. e. Actual equipment locations. f. Duct size and routing. g. Locations of concealed internal utilities. h. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. i. Changes made following Architect's written orders. j. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. k. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. l. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

96 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file; scanned and numbered the same as each drawing name and number. 3. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

97 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of markedup miscellaneous record submittals. 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

98 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner [ready for reuse]. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: 1. Conduct conference at Project site. 2. GC to provide written minutes 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. B. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. C. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

99 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: a. Furniture and mobile equipment C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

100 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs and preconstruction video. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

101 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent spaces C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

102 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area [designated by Owner]. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

103 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be[ recycled,] reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

104 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION MILLWORK AND CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 2. Wood and plastic laminate cabinets (casework). 3. Plastic laminate countertops. 4. Solid surfaces B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for exposed framing and for furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing interior woodwork. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork and casework during fabrication, finishing, and installation. C. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcing specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, and other items installed in architectural woodwork. 4. Samples for initial selection of the following in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. 5. Particleboard: Submit samples and certification that particleboard to be supplied meets specified requirements. MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

105 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 D. Product certificates signed by woodwork and casework fabricator certifying that products comply with specified requirements. E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. F. Product data for each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork and casework during fabrication, finishing, and installation. G. Samples for initial selection of the following in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. 1. Lumber and panel products with nonfactory-applied finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches (203 by 250 mm) for panels for each species and cut, with one-half of exposed surface finished. 2. Lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches (203 by 250 mm) for panels for each finish system and color. 3. Each type of paneling specified 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork and casework similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for interior architectural woodwork and casework installation by a firm that can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork and casework items similar in type and quality to those required for this Project. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Arrange for production of interior architectural woodwork and casework with sequence-matched wood veneers by a single firm. D. Single-Source Responsibility for Fabrication and Installation: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for fabricating, finishing, and installing woodwork and casework specified in this Section. E. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standard: 1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork and casework Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork and casework Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

106 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 a. Provide AWI Certification Labels or Certificates of Compliance indicating that woodwork and casework meets requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the Quality Standard as well as additional requirements beyond those of the Quality Standard. Comply with such selections and requirements in addition to the Quality Standard. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify fire-retardant-treated material with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Not exceeding values indicated below, tested per ASTM E 84 for 30 minutes with no evidence of significant combustion. In addition, the flame front shall not progress more than 10-1/2 feet beyond the center line of the burner at any time during the test. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork and casework during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, silage, and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork and casework until painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork and casework have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork and casework must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: 1. From time of manufacture until deliver, store Work such as casework, countertops, etc. in conditioned spaces to maintain a moisture level as recommended by the AWI or 12 percent maximum, whichever is more severe. Work that is exposed to unacceptable conditions prior to delivery shall be removed and replaced with new work. Warping, MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

107 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 delaminated finishes, sticking drawers or doors, or moisture levels exceeding 12 percent are indicative of improper storage or exposure to moisture. 2. Coordinate delivery so that work is not on site more than 10 days prior to installation. If delivery will require more than 10 days on site prior to installation, store in bonded and conditioned warehouse until time of installation. Casework that remains on site more than 10 days prior to installation shall be removed and replaced with new casework. 3. Do not deliver or install casework until the building is enclosed and is in the dry; roof system installed; exterior doors and windows, including weather-stripping are installed; all wet operations such as concrete, fireproofing, plastering have been completed; and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 4. Obtain and comply with casework fabricator's and installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for casework during its storage and installation. Do not install casework until these conditions have been attained and stabilized so that casework will be within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of installation through remainder of construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork and casework is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support woodwork and casework by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on final shop drawings. 2. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork and casework without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork and casework can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved schedule for cabinet hardware specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" to fabricator of casework; coordinate cabinet shop drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. 1.9 DEFINITIONS The following definitions are in accordance with the AWI Quality Standards: A. Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces that are exposed when: MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

108 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Drawer fronts and doors are closed 2. Cabinets and shelving are open-type or are behind clear glass doors. 3. Bottoms of cabinets are seen 42 inches or more above finished floor. 4. Top of cabinets are seen below 78 inches above finish floor or are visible from an upper floor or staircase after installation. 5. Portions of cabinets are visible when fixes appliances are installed. 6. Front edges of cabinet body members. B. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces visible when: 1. Drawers or doors are in open position. 2. Bottoms of cabinets are between 30 inches and up to 42 inches above finished floor. 3. All front edges of shelving behind doors. C. Concealed Surfaces: Surfaces are concealed when: 1. Surfaces are not visible after installation. 2. Bottoms of cabinets are less than 30 inches above finish floor. 3. Tops of cabinets are over 78 inches above finish floor and are not visible from an upper level. 4. Stretchers, blocking, and/or components are concealed by drawers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOODWORK AND CASEWORK FABRICATORS A. Available Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, fabricators offering casework that may be incorporated in the Work are: 1. Blue Ridge Cabinetworks 2. Carolina Casework 3. Case Systems 4. Interior Wood Specialties, Elizabethtown, NC 5. Modular Millwork 6. New River Cabinet & Fixture Inc., Duluth, GA 7. Palmetto Wood Design 8. Satterfield Woodworking 9. TMI 10. Woodco, Inc 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and casework and quality grade indicated and, where the following products MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

109 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 are part of interior woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product characteristics indicated: 1. Texture: Smooth, flat, tight grain surface that will not telegraph grain through painted finish. Solid lumber stock, finger joints not acceptable. All wood and lumber shall be straight, flat, and true without bows, warps, splinters, cracks, nicks, or gouges. 2. Wood Species: As selected by the Architect for full range of available custom and standard wood species and in selected color and grain pattern. B. Wood Products 1. Comply with the following: a. Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Provide products with an average recycled content so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 20 percent. b. Hardboard: AHA A c. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no added urea formaldehyde. Arreis by Sierra Pine or a reviewed substitute with following properties: 1. Density: 48 pcf Minimum 2. Moisture Content: 4-6 % 3. Modulus Of Rupture: 5,200 psi 4. Modulus of Elasticity: 520,000 psi 5. Internal Bond: 115 psi 6. Hardness: 1,150 psi 7. Linear Expansion: % 8. Thickness Tolerance: +/ /-inch 9. Face Screw Holding: 325 pounds 10. Edge Screw Holding: 250 pounds d. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-3-Exterior Glue. Made with binder no added urea formaldehyde. Particleboard shall have the following properties: 1. Density: 47 pcf Minimum 2. Moisture Content: 6 % 3. Modulus Of Rupture: 2400 psi 4. Modulus of Elasticity: 450,00 psi 5. Internal Bond: 80 psi 6. Hardness: 900 psi 7. Linear Expansion: % 8. Thickness Tolerance: +/ /-inch 9. Face Screw Holding: 325 pounds 10. Edge Screw Holding: 275 pounds e. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. No added urea formaldehyde. f. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): Comply with DOC PS 1, ASTM D5456, and HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

110 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. Adhesives, General: Low VOC; un-pigmented. No added formaldehyde. Moisture proof for any area subject to moisture of any type, condensation, or relative humidity over 90 percent. Type recommended by the manufacturer of components being bonded. 3. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Wood Glues: 30 g/l. b. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/l. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, heavy wear grade. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Laminart. c. Nevamar d. Pionite e. Wilson Art 2. Colors and Patterns For Plastic Laminate and Edge Trim: As selected by the Architect. Allow for the Architect s selection of as many colors and patterns as desired from full range of custom colors and patterns to meet project requirements for all surfaces indicated, specified, or intended to receive plastic laminate and edge trim. D. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," for lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. E. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. F. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

111 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 G. Softwood Plywood: Comply with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood." and ASTM D5456, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. H. Hardwood Plywood: Comply with HPVA HP-1, "Interim Voluntary Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood." And ASTM D5456 and made with no added urea formaldehyde. I. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement, un-pigmented, low VOC. No added urea formaldehyde. J. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Decorative surface of thermally fused polyester or melamineimpregnated web, bonded to specified substrate and complying with ALA Substrate: Medium-density fiberboard. K. Solid Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with the material and performance requirements of ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or Type 6, without a precoated finish. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Avonite; Avonite, Inc. b. Surell; Formica Corp. c. Fountainhead; Nevamar Corp. d. Swanstone; The Swan Corporation. e. Gibraltar; Wilson Art. L. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD for interior and MD-Exterior Glue for exterior. Use only where indicated on the Drawings. No added urea formaldehyde. M. Paneling Adhesives: Low VOC. Comply with paneling manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives. 2.4 HARDWARE A. General 1. Cabinet Hardware Schedule: Refer to schedule at end of this Section for cabinet hardware required for architectural cabinets. 2. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by reference to BHMA numbers or referenced to this standard. 3. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A Match finish of door Hardware furnished under section Door Hardware. MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

112 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 4. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements of BHMA A B. Hardware 1. Hinges: a. Concealed (5 knuckle) Hinges: Self-closing, 170-deg. swing, 6-way adjustment. Doors Two hinges on doors less than 36. inches; 3 hinges on doors 36 inches to 60 inches; 4 hinges on doors 60 inches to 84 inches; 5 hinges on doors over 84 inches. When installed, hinges shall be capable of supporting a 100-pound test load located 1 inch from the outside edge of the door, and shall be able to withstand 100,000 full open/close cycles and still maintain original fit and alignment with no signs of rack, distortion, sag, or wobble. By Blum. 1). Butt Hinges: Heavy duty, 2-3/4 inch, 5 knuckle, inch thick steel. 2. Pulls: 4-inch satin aluminum wire pull, 1-1/2 inches deep, and 5/16 inches diameter. 3. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full extension, self-closing, steel drawer slides with smooth, hard impact-resistant, epoxy-coated finish, steel ball bearings complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1 and rated for the following loads: Slides shall be cradle-type that wrap the bottom edges of the drawer to support the drawer from the bottom: a. Box Drawer Slides: 100 lbf. b. File Drawer Slides: 150 lbf. Equip with Pendaflex file frames. 4. Locks: Disk tumbler, chrome finish, removable core. Key into Owner s master keying system. a. Basis of design Locks / strikes, by CCL Security Products b. Submit actual sample for review by MUSC lock shop c. Provide for ALL drawers and cabinets. d. Submit keying schedule for MUSC lock shop review 5. Grommets for cable passage through countertops: 2 inch OD, molded-plastic grommets with 3/4-inch hole and plastic cap with slot for wire passage. Color selected by Architect from full range of manufacturer s colors. 6. Catches: Magnetic Catches: B Adjustable Shelf Standards: B a. Shelf Rests for Standards: B INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

113 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 A. Provide finished lumber and moldings to match reviewed samples for indicated species showing grade, texture, and dimensions. B. Quality Standard: Custom C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. D. Species: Wood shall be smooth and even, with clear, tight, flat, smooth and uniform grain free of defects that will be detrimental to the applied finish. Grain for painted wood shall not telegraph through a typical painted finish consisting of primer and 2 finish coats with an overall thickness of 6 mils. 1. Species For Painting: Hemlock, douglas fir, or poplar. 2. Species For Staining: Red Oak, rift sawn E. Wood Molding Patterns: Provide clear, kiln-dried stock moldings made to match reviewed samples of indicated species showing grade, texture, grain pattern, dimensions, and color for the following items: 1. Base 2. Casing 3. Stop 4. Moldings 5. Shoe Mold 6. Chair Rail 2.6 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Interior Standing and running trim : Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. B. Sealants: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials required for sealing siding work. LOW VOC. C. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. D. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME B for applicable requirements. 1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer. E. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements. MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

114 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 F. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. G. Adhesives: Moisture proof for any area subject to moisture of any type, condensation, or relative humidity over 90 percent. Type recommended by the manufacturer of components being bonded. 2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork and casework Grade: Provide interior woodwork and casework complying with the referenced quality standard and of the following grade: 1. Grade: Custom B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. D. Fabricate wood work and casework to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid-wood (lumber) members 3/4 inch thick or less: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 3/4 inch thick: 1/8 inch. E. Fabricate woodwork and casework to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid-wood (lumber) members 3/4 inch thick or less: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 3/4 inch thick: 1/8 inch. F. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Trial fit assemblies at the fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

115 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on approved shop drawings before disassembling for shipment. G. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive sinks, hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughingin diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water-resistant coating. H. Fabricate standing and running trim to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 1. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished work: a. Interior standing and running trim, except shoe mold and crown mold. 2. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius. 3. Ease edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius. I. Top/Backsplashes: Fabricate tops in one-piece with top and backsplash as an integral unit. Provide square front with a coved surface over top and up backsplash. Wrap laminate around and under work surface so that there are no exposed surfaces or edges. 1. Unless indicated otherwise, install end splashes in units with sinks and where the end of the counter or cabinet tops butt to a vertical surface. Laminate end splashes the same as back splashes. J. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. K. Matching Grain: Where wood trim is not available as a single length or width for intended applications, splices shall be carefully selected and made for the best aesthetic appearance as determined by the Architect. Select and arrange wood sections to be joined for best match of adjacent sections where grain character or color variations are noticeable. Match color and grain pattern across each end and side joint. Contact the Architect for a determination where appearance is uncertain. L. Base Frame Construction: All members of the base frame that are in contact with the finished floor shall be constructed of pressure treated solid wood of thickness indicated. Glued assemblies of thinner members to achieve the required thickness are not acceptable. Construction/assembly of the base frame assembly with particle board, OSB, or other types of engineered wood are not acceptable. Fastening shall be with Type 304 or 306 stainless steel fasteners. 2.8 LAMINATE-CLAD CABINETS (PLASTIC-COVERED CASEWORK) MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

116 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section requirements for laminate-clad cabinets. 1. Grade: Custom B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated. 1. Reveal Dimension: As indicated. C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: GP-50, inch nominal thickness. 2. Vertical Surfaces: GP-28, inch nominal thickness. 3. Edges: a. PVC: 3 mm PVC machined to 1/8 inch radius applied with holt melt adhesive. Machine flush and buffed to remove all machine marks and eased (sharp corners removed). Clean up at easing shall be such that no overlap of the member eased is visible. Chip out of the laminate shall be invisible when viewed from 24 inches. Maintain maximum variation of inch flushness with adjacent surfaces. All edge banding shall be free of bubbles, wrinkles, delamination, and adhesive residue. Adhesive: Hot melt. D. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies:GP-28, Match exposed surfaces. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid hardwood lumber with shop-applied melamine finish. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood, shop-finished. 4. Open Shelving: Match exposed surfaces. E. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of custom and standard colors and finishes in the following categories: 1. Solid colors. 2. Solid colors, with core same color as surface. 3. Wood grains. 4 Patterns. 5. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. 6. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 2.9 COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section requirements for Custom Grade for countertops. B. Type of Top: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following: 1. Grade: GP-50, inch (1.270-mm) nominal thickness. MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

117 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the following categories: a. Solid colors. b. Solid colors, with core same color as surface. c. Wood grains. d Patterns. 3. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. 4. Edge Treatment: a. HPDL, GP-50, inch nominal thickness. Match color, pattern and texture of adjacent surfaces. 5. Core Material: Plywood except use exterior grade plywood for units to receive sinks and in areas exposed to moisture C. Provide and install unbreakable 2 inch diameter grommets above each electrical and data outlet. Color of grommets shall match finish of adjacent surface of countertop. Surfaces of grommet shall be smooth and rounded to prevent wear and damage to cable and wire SOLID SURFACING MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with applicable AWI section: 1. Grade: Custom. B. Fabrication: Where solid surfaces are indicated on the Drawings, fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated. Provide with integral sink. Comply with solid surfacing material manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop. 2. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in the shop. C. Solid Surfacing Material Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm). D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid surface material complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

118 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 A. Condition casework and woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. B. Before installing architectural casework and woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install casework and woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork and casework involved. B. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. C. Install millwork plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where required for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut standing and running trim to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Countersink nails, fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level. Install adjoining standing and running trim with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. D. Install woodwork and casework plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inchesfor plumb and level (including tops). F. Anchor casework to proper anchors, blocking, and reinforcement built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. 1. Installation of casework and cabinets shall be rigid enough to allow drawers loaded to rated capacity to be fully extended without causing casework or cabinets to sag, droop, bind, or other distortions and to not pull away from the mounts or fasteners and without causing fasteners to loosen or pull from mounts or walls. G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Do not use MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

119 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 pieces less than 36 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base, if finished. 1. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes 2. Countersink nails, fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable. 3. Match color and grain patterns across joints. 4. Install trim after joint finishing in gypsum board and plaster have been completed. 5. Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where necessary. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base, if finished. 6. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, if required. 7. Install standing and running trim with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch variation from a straight line. 8. Coordinate standing and running trim with materials and systems in or adjacent to standing and running trim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exposed surfaces of trim and rails H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. I. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. Where backsplash butts to a vertical surface, caulk space between backsplash and vertical surface with specified sealant. 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

120 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 J. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to the extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats were applied in the shop. K. Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork and casework where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. Defects include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Spits 2. Loose 3. Bowed 4. Dented 5. Warped 6. Chipped 7. Cracked 8. Buckleing 9. Scratched 19 Discolored 11. Open joints 12. Rough finish 13 Uneven Joints 14. Visible hole filler 15 Unmatched materials 16. Raised/Telegraph grain 17. Not level, plumb, or square 18. Fasteners not countersunk and holes filled 19. Other defects objectionable to the Architect B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork and casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shopapplied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and Installer that ensures that woodwork and casework is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

121 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 END OF SECTION MILLWORK AND CASEWORK

122 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fireresistance-rated assembly. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Provide a completed copy of the Materials Submittal Information Form. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Product test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

123 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Grace Construction Products. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. NUCO Inc. 7. Passive Fire Protection Partners. 8. RectorSeal Corporation. 9. Specified Technologies Inc M Fire Protection Products. 11. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 12. USG Corporation. 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg 1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg 1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

124 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 D. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. E. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Sealants: 250 g/l. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/l. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/l. F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. C. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet. D. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. F. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. G. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. H. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

125 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping. D. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. E. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. F. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

126 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase IDENTIFICATION A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.4 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ. B. Where FM Global-approved systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers listed in FM Global's "Building Materials Approval Guide" under "Wall and Floor Penetration Fire Stops." C. Firestopping final product provided by contractor END OF SECTION PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

127 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing agency. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Product test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-resistive joint system tests are performed by UL or a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

128 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079: 1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction they will join. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. b. CEMCO. c. Fire Trak Corp. d. Grace Construction Products. e. Hilti, Inc. f. Johns Manville. g. Nelson Firestop Products. h. NUCO Inc. i. Passive Fire Protection Partners. j. RectorSeal Corporation. k. Specified Technologies Inc. l. 3M Fire Protection Products. m. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. n. USG Corporation. C. Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. D. Low-Emitting Materials: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." E. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

129 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fireresistive joint system. D. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fireresistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of joint edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or selfadhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements. B. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. END OF SECTION FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

130 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications: 1. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and partitions. e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. g. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. b. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. c. Other joints as indicated. C. Related Sections include the following: D. List below only construction that the reader might expect to find in this Section but is specified elsewhere. Subparagraphs below do not include Sections that cross-reference this Section for requirements. 1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS JOINT SEALANTS

131 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Provide a completed copy of the Materials Submittal Information Form. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated, and sealant plus the primers and cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi component materials. JOINT SEALANTS

132 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses. B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the JOINT SEALANTS

133 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: For each product of this description indicated in the Acoustical Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following: 1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin. 2. Type O: Open-cell material. 3. Type: Any material indicated above. C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide selfadhesive tape where applicable. JOINT SEALANTS

134 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. Metal. JOINT SEALANTS

135 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 b. Glass. c. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. 1. F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. JOINT SEALANTS

136 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. 3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Low-Modulus Nonacid-Curing Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type is required, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following. a. 790 /795; Dow Corning. b. Silpruf; GE Silicones. c. UltraPruf SCS2300; GE Silicones. d. 864; Pecora Corporation. e. 890; Pecora Corporation. f. PSI-641; Polymeric Systems, Inc. g. Spectrem 2; Tremco. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression for a total of 100 percent movement. 5. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. JOINT SEALANTS

137 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 a. Use O Joint Substrates: Anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a highperformance coating, galvanized steel, brick. 7. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C Applications: For all exterior vertical joints of masonry, metal to metal, and dissimilar materials and systems, unless otherwise indicated. B. High-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type is required, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following. a. 995; Dow Corning. b. Ultraglaze 4000; GE Silicones. c. Ultraglaze 4000AC; GE Silicones. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression for a total of 100 percent movement. 5. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 7. Below are examples of Use O substrates. Retain only those that apply or insert others. a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating. 8. Applications: For all exterior window, storefront and exterior wall systems. C. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type is required, provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes, and that comply with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following. a. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning. b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones. c. NuFlex 302; NUCO Industries, Inc. d. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation. e. PSI-611; Polymeric Systems, Inc. f. Tremsil 600 White; Tremco. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. JOINT SEALANTS

138 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 a. Use O Joint Substrates: Plastics and ceramic tile. 6. Applications: Toilets, Janitors closets, and Food Preparation Areas. D. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type is required, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following. a. Chem-Calk 550; Bostik Inc. b. Vulkem 245; Mameco International. c. Vulkem 255; Mameco International. d. Pourthane; W.R. Meadows, Inc. e. Elasto-Thane 920 Pourable; Pacific Polymers, Inc. f. NR-200 Urexpan; Pecora Corporation. g. NR-300 Urexpan, Type M; Pecora Corporation. h. PSI-270SL; Polymeric Systems, Inc. i. PSI-551/RC-2; Polymeric Systems, Inc. j. Sikaflex - 2c SL; Sika Corporation. k. SL 2; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc. l. THC-900; Tremco. m. THC-901; Tremco. 2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable). 3. Class: Use[s] Related to Exposure: T (traffic), NT (nontraffic), T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, granite, limestone, marble, ceramic tile, and wood. 3.7 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Latex Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type is required, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following. a. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. b. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. c. Tremflex 834; Tremco. 3.8 ACOUSTICAL JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Where joint sealants of this type is required, provide products complying with the following: JOINT SEALANTS

139 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Products: Provide one of the following. a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corporation. b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; USG Corp., United States Gypsum Co. B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Where joint sealants of this type is required, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following. a. Pro-Series SC-170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant; Ohio Sealants, Inc. b. BA-98; Pecora Corporation. c. Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALANTS

140 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow-metal work. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details. C. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. D. Wiring Diagram: Prepare wiring diagrams to all electrified doors/frames for proposed electrical installation (strikes, locks, security systems). E. Other Action Submittals: 1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

141 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amweld International, LLC. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Custom Metal Products. 5. Gensteel Doors Inc. 6. National Custom Hollow Metal. 7. North American Door Corp. 8. Republic Doors and Frames. 9. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperaturerise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

142 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches c. Face: Uncoated,cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of inch (1.0 mm). d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush e. Core: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Uncoated,steel sheet, minimum thickness of inch (1.3 mm). b. Construction: welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.4 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than inch thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inchdiameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of inch as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

143 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. E. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. G. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials. H. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. I. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). J. Glazing: Section "Glazing." K. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

144 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match coursing, and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high. b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high. c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

145 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. E. Door Wiring: On all electrified doors/frames provide the following: 1. Electrical Box: Provide electrical boxes at each exterior door integral with the frame and provided with a cover. Install 1/2 inch conduit in frames. Coordinate conduit requirements with Division 26 of the specifications. Installation to be used by owner. 2. Electrical Power Transfer Box: provide one electrical power transfer box on each side of the frame. Coordinate box with hinge location. Installation to be used by owner. 3. Grout Box: On pairs of doors, provided grout box in top of each frame and located on each side of the meeting stile of the door. F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollowmetal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: SDI A ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than inch thick. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

146 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. e. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber insulation. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to manufacturer's written instructions. 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

147 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at jambs at floor. B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section "Glazing" and with hollowmetal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

148 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. C. Samples: For factory-finished doors. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Chappell Door Co. 3. Eggers Industries. 4. General Veneer Manufacturing Co. FLUSH WOOD DOORS

149 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 5. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company. 6. Haley Brothers, Inc. 7. Ipik Door Company. 8. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 9. Mohawk Doors; a Masonite company. 10. Oshkosh Door Company. 11. Poncraft Door Company. 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. C. Acoustical Doors: 1. Cores: Provide core specified or as needed to provide STC rating indicated. 2. Frame: Frame door assembly shall be compatible and provide STC rating specified. 3. STC Rating: At all mechanical room door locations provide door/frame assembly with and STC rating of 50 or higher. D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated. 2. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 3. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. E. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf. b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf. FLUSH WOOD DOORS

150 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase VENEER-FACED DOORS A. Interior Solid-Core Doors 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species: Select Natural Birch (Rotary) 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. 6. Construction: Five plies. 7. Basis of Design: Match existing phase 1 renovation doors 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. B. Existing frames: Where new doors are to be placed into existing frames, door provider and GC are to field verify all conditions. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish. C. Transparent Finish:Provide samples for approval 1. Grade: Premium 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" provide samples for finish selection by architect. 3. Staining: match MUSC Standard 4. Effect: Semifilled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill the wood pores. 5. Sheen: Satin FLUSH WOOD DOORS

151 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for firerated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. END OF SECTION FLUSH WOOD DOORS

152 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Definition: "Finish Hardware" includes items known commercially as finish / security hardware and systems which are required for swing, sliding and folding doors, except special types of unique and non-matching hardware specified in the same section as the door and door frame. B. Extent of finish / security hardware required is indicated on drawings and in schedules. C. Types of finish hardware required include, but are not limited to, the following: D. References Butt Hinges Lock cylinders and keys Lock and latch sets Exit devices Pull units Closers Door trim units Protection plates Thresholds, Gaskets, and Door Bottoms Electrified Hardware Coat Hooks at office doors NFPA Standard for Fire Doors and Windows NFPA Life Safety Code NFPA 70 National Electric Code ADA The Americans with Disabilities Act Title III Public Accommodations ANSI-A American National Standards Institute Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities ANSI-A156.5-American National Standards Institute Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products International Building Code as Adopted Positive Pressure Testing UL10C & UBC7.2 UL - Underwriters Laboratories WHI Warnock Hersey International, Division of Inchscape Testing Services State, Local and Federal Codes, National Electrical Building Codes, including the Authority Having Jurisdiction DOOR HARDWARE

153 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase RELATED WORK. A. Flush Wood Doors - Section B. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (ie lock sets / security equipment) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. B. Supplier: A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware and installation in the project's vicinity for a period of not less than 4 years. The supplier shall be, or shall employ, a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about project's hardware requirements, to the Owner, Architect and the Contractor. The certified architectural hardware consultant (AHC) shall prepare all hardware and wiring diagrams. This Supplier is responsible for proper coordination of all finished hardware with related sections to insure compatibility of products. C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA Standard No. 80 and local building code requirements. Provide only hardware, which has been tested and listed by UL / WHI or FM for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels. Provide door seals to meet Positive Pressure Testing UL10C and UBC7 2 as required. D. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors (with supplementary marking on doors' UL or FM labels indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware") provide UL / WHI or FM label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". E. Thru-bolt door closers and exit devices as standard application. Verify and coordinate with the MUSC Project Manger. If solid blocking is specified in the wood door specification, thru-bolts may not be required for hardware attachment in these doors. F. Unless otherwise specified, provide lever handle locksets ADA compliant. G. Pre-Installation Meeting: The Contractor shall initiate and conduct a jobsite meeting with the hardware supplier and the Installer, and all related trades for mechanical and electrical hardware. This meeting shall convene at least one month prior to commencement of the related work, specifically, the electrical rough-in for coordination of electrified hardware applications. All approved shop drawings, wiring diagrams, and schedules shall be made available to all related trades as required for work to be performed. The Owner s representative shall attend all pre-install meetings. In addition to reviewing and the coordinating the applications, the hardware supplier shall, with the assistance of the manufacturer s representative, provide a review and training to the Installers of the following products prior to installation of these products: closers, exit devices, locks, and electrified hardware. The Hardware Supplier shall provide a written DOOR HARDWARE

154 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 certificate of attendance to the Installers at the training. The Hardware Supplier shall provide the Contractor the names of the training attendees. H. Keying Meeting: Not required. Owner shall self-perform all keying. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s technical product data for each item of hardware in accordance with Division-1 section "Submittals". Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with requirements, and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finish. B. Hardware Schedule: Submit seven copies of schedule in accordance with Division 1 Submittals, General Requirements. Schedule to be in vertical format, listing each door opening, including: Keying Information, handing of opening, all hardware scheduled for opening or otherwise required to allow for proper function of door openings as intended, and finish of hardware. At doors with door closers or door controls, include degree of door opening. All submittals (schedules, cut sheets, diagrams) shall be reviewed by the MUSC project manager & MUSC Locksmith prior to ordering of material. Supply the schedules and all templates within two (2) weeks from date purchase order is received by the door openings supplier. Furnish wiring diagrams (elevation, riser, and point-to-point) for all electrified hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on finish hardware indicated, organize hardware schedule into a vertical format with "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on e. Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. f. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc., contained in schedule. g. Mounting locations for hardware. h. Door and frame sizes and materials. i. Keying information. j. Describe door operation function with the electrified hardware. C. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g., hollow metal frames), which is critical in the project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by finish hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of hardware schedule. D. Omitted DOOR HARDWARE

155 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 E. Samples if Requested: Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior to final ordering of finish hardware, submit any requested samples of type of exposed hardware unit, finished as required, and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. F. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory-prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for proper location, coordination and installation of hardware. G. Manufacturer s Catalog Cuts: Submit manufacturer s cut/catalog sheets on all hardware items and any required special mounting instructions with the hardware schedule. K. Wiring Diagrams: Provide complete wiring diagrams for each opening requiring electrified hardware. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted after approval. Supply a copy with delivery of hardware to job site and another copy to the Owner at time of job completion. All electrical components to be listed by opening in the hardware submittals. I Operational Descriptions: Provide complete operational descriptions of electronic components listed by opening in the hardware submittals. Operational descriptions to detail how each electrified component functions within the opening incorporating all conditions of ingress and egress. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted for approval. Supply another copy with delivery of hardware to job site and another copy to the Owner upon project completion. Review these descriptions with all related trades at the Pre-Install meetings. J. Elevation Drawings: Provide elevation drawings of electronic hardware and systems identifying locations of the system components with respect to their placement in the door opening. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted for approval. Supply another copy to the Owner upon project completion. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. B. Inventory hardware jointly with the General Contractor, representatives of hardware supplier / hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. C. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or project site) for installation. D. The General Contractor shall provide secure lock-up for hardware and security equipment delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items, which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING DOOR HARDWARE

156 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 A. Deliver all finish hardware to the job site in a timely manner so not to delay progress of other trades. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturers warranties as follows: 1. Hinges: Life of the Building. 2. Mortise Locksets: 10-year warranty, minimum, against manufacturing defects and workmanship. 3. Door Closers: 10-year warranty, minimum, against manufacturing defects and workmanship. 4. Exit Devices: 3-year warranty, minimum, against manufacturing defects and workmanship. 5. ADA Operators: 2-year warranty, minimum, against manufacturing defects and workmanship. 6. Balance of items shall carry a manufacturer s 1-year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship. B. During the warranty period, replace defective product, including labor, materials, and other costs incidental to the work. Upon written notice from the MUSC Project Manger, the Contractor and the Hardware Supplier shall inspect the work within 24 hours after completion, and provide written receipt of completion of the warranty work to the MUSC Project Manager. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware is indicated in the Hardware Sets at the end of this section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: Hardware Item: Specified Manufacturer Designation Butts: Ives IVE Continuous Hinges Ives IVE Locksets: Corbin-Russwin/Schlage C-R/SCH Cylinders/Cores Best Cormax BST Silencers: Ives IVE Stops: Ives IVE Closers: LCN LCN Thresholds: National Guard NGP Gasket/Door Bottoms: National Guard NGP Kickplates: Ives IVE Pulls: Ives IVE Exit Devices: Von Duprin VON Flush Bolts: Ives IVE Automatic Flush Bolts: Ives IVE Magnetic Holders: LCN LCN Miscellaneous Hardware: Ives, Glynn-Johnson IVE/GLY DOOR HARDWARE

157 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 Electric Strikes: Von Duprin VON Power Supplies Power Transfers:Von Duprin VON Door Position Switch: Schlage Electronics SCE Overhead Stops Glynn-Johnson GLY B. Provide products as hereafter specified. Substitutions other than those manufacturers listed, must be approved, in writing, via addenda, prior to bid. Procedure for substitutions shall be as outlined in Division 1. No substitutions will considered after award of contract. 2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. General: 1. Hand of door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown. 2. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer's products which have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates), except in conjunction with required UL labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. 3. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. 4. Finishes: a. 626/652 for all finished metal hardware items except as 630 is otherwise indicated. Door closers to be powder coated to match 652/626. Exit devices to be US26D with stainless steel touchbars. 5. Lockset Design: Lever handle design shall be LWA for mortise locks. 6. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware, which has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except, as specifically indicated. 7. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of such other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. 8. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is closed, except to extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Use thru-bolts for closer and exit devices. Coordinate wood door blocking at all wood doors and all fire rated wood doors. Provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 9. Tools and Maintenance Instructions for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of finish hardware. 2.3 HINGES AND BUTTS A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. DOOR HARDWARE

158 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Screws: Furnish Phillips flat-head or machine screws for installation of units, except furnish Phillips flat-head or wood screws for installation of units into wood. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Steel Hinges: Steel pins. 2. Non-ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins. 3. Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins. 4. Out-swing Corridor Doors: Non-removable pins. 5. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. 6. Tips: Flat button, Match plug finish to match hinge leaves. 7. Number of hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges for door leaf for doors 90" or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30" of additional height. D. Continuous Geared Hinges: Not Used E. Continuous Pin and Barrel Hinges: Pin and Barrel Continuous Hinges: ANSI/ BHMA A Grade 1 1. Provide full mortise, non-handed, full height hinges with symmetrically template hole pattern made from 14 gauge, 304 stainless steel. 2. Each knuckle shall be approximately 2, including split nylon bearing at each separation. 3. Pin Diameters: 1/4 4. External Barrel Diameter; 7/16 5. Finish: BHMA #630 (US32D) 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hager: b. Ives: 700 Series c. Markar: FM 300 Series 2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain final instructions in writing. All keying shall be in accordance with the Owner s existing Grand Master Key Systems. B. Review the core requirements with the MUSC Locksmith. C. Equip locks and cylinders with cylinders for interchangeable core, 7-pin housings with construction cores as specified. All cylinders and cores shall be by Best. The hardware supplier shall furnish 0 bitted permanent Best Cormax cores, and two (2) each key blanks per lock. The 0 bitted cores shall be furnished as: 1CM7MM CORMAX CORE 1 CM PATENTED CORE. The blanks shall be stamped: Do Not Duplicate. All permanent cores/cylinders and keys shall be shipped directly to the Owner from the factory. The Owner shall perform all keying and install all permanent keyed cores. DOOR HARDWARE

159 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 D. Furnish temporary Construction Keyed cores for the duration of the construction period. Construction cores shall be furnished as 1CC-7-A-2-GREEN, and not part of the Owner s existing key system. The Hardware Supplier shall furnish the construction cores and they shall remain the property of the Hardware Supplier. The Contractor shall return all construction cores and keys to the Hardware Supplier at project completion. Furnish ten (10) Construction Keys and one (1) control key (35-003) for the General Contractor s use during project construction. E. Equip locks with cylinders that comply with performance requirements for Grade 1 cylinders as listed in ANSI A156, and are UL-listed. F. Permanent keys: Allow 2 each change keys per lock. G. Omitted H. Omitted I. Key Quantity/ Extra s: (10) each key blanks per 20 cores provided for project. 2.5 LOCKS, LATCHES AND BOLTS A. Locksets shall be as specified: Mortise type lockset shall be Series 1000, Grade 1 Operational and Security, UL Listed for 3-hour fire door. Approved manufacturers: Corbin-Russwin ML2000 series; Schlage L9000L. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with ANSI curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set. Where specified, provide a vandal resistant trim. At single toilet rooms specify privacy as ML2060 LWA M19VN function. B. Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction provides non-recessed strike for bolt. C. Lock Throw: Provide solid stainless steel 1 ½ deadbolt with 1" minimum throw. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. D. Provide 3/4" minimum throw on latch bolts. E. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2" diameter rods of brass, bronze or stainless steel, with minimum 12" long rod for doors up to 7'-0" in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 7'-0" in height. F. Exit Device Dogging: Except on fire-rated doors, wherever closers are provided on doors equipped with exit devices, equip the units with keyed dogging device to hold the push bar down and the latch bolt in the open position. G. Rabbeted Doors: Where rabbeted door stiles are indicated, provide special rabbeted front on lock and latch units and bolts. DOOR HARDWARE

160 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase PULLS/ PUSH PLATES A. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation; through-bolted for matched pairs, but not for single units. Furnish type and size as specified in Hardware Sets. 2.7 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit, depending upon size of door, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. B. Closers: All door closers shall be of one manufacturer to provide for proper installation and servicing after installation. All closers shall be inspected after installation by a factory representative to ensure proper adjustment and operation. A report shall be filed with the architect after said visit has been made. Closer shall carry a manufacturer's TEN YEAR WARRANTY for hydraulic units and 2 year warranty for electrical and/or handicap power assist door closers against manufacturing defects and workmanship. All closers shall be high strength cast iron with one piece forged steel piston. PRV [ pressure relief valves ] are not acceptable. C. Parallel Arm Closers: Shall incorporate one piece solid forged steel arms with bronze bushings. 1-9/16" x 1/2" steel stud shoulder bolts, shall be incorporated in regular arms, hold open arms, arms with stop built in, arms with hold open and stop built in. All other closers shall have forged steel main arms for strength, and durability. D. Built-In Stops: Where closers with built-in positive stops are used, the stops shall be of one piece cast malleable iron material with built in springs. Where required, the hold-open assembly handle for these stops shall rotate on ball bearings. E. All door closers shall pass UL10C positive pressure fire test. F. Non-sized and specific to door mounting: All exterior closers shall be non-sized to provide a full range of Size 1 to 5 closing power, and shall be handed. G. Hydraulic Fluid: All closers, with the exception of interior electronic closers, shall utilize temperature stable fluid capable of withstanding temperature ranges of 120 degrees F. to -30F. without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Fluid shall be nonflammable. H. All closers shall have a powder coat finish on closer body, arm, cover and adapter plate. Furnish special rust inhibiting pre-treat coating, as specified, for closer body, arm, cover and plates before the powder coat finish. I. Provide all drop plates, shoe supports, templates, etc. to properly mount closers according to manufacturers recommendations. J. The preferred manufacturer: LCN 4111/4011. Acceptable manufacturers: Sargent 281 DOOR HARDWARE

161 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 series; Corbin-Russwin DC8200 series. K. Closers shall be thru-bolt mounted, unless otherwise directed. 2.8 EXIT DEVICES A. General: All devices shall be of one manufacturer to provide for proper installation and servicing. Devices shall be furnished non-handed and capable of direct field conversion for all available trim functions. All devices shall carry a three year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship. All devices shall be either narrow-stile cross-bar type or push-through touch pad design as specified. No exposed touch bar fasteners, no exposed cavities when operated. B. Furnish all touch-pad type devices with stainless steel touch bars. Plastic parts are not acceptable. C. Furnish all touch-pad type exit devices with deadlocking latch bolts. Latchbolts shall be moly-coated to reduce friction against the strike. D. Furnish all touch-pad exit devices with heavy duty cast metal end caps, flush with device housing.. E. Furnish roller strikes with all rim exit devices. F. Furnish stabilizers similar to Von Duprin 154 with all removable mullions. G. Outside Trim: Shall be heavy duty type and fastened by means of concealed welded lugs and thru-bolts from the inside. Trim shall be forged brass with a minimum average thickness on the escutcheon of.130. Plate with trim shall be brass with minimum average thickness of.090 and have forged pulls. Where Lever Handles are specified provide 996 type Break Away Trim. Where outside trim is specified, furnish trim that thru-bolts directly to the exit device center case. H. Furnish cylinders with all lockable exit devices. I. Furnish required filler plates and shim kits for flush mounting of exit devices on all doors requiring same. J. Springs: Compression type only. Torsion springs are not acceptable. K. The preferred exit device: Von Duprin 35A/98 series. Corbin-Russwin ED5200 series is acceptable, in the hardware sets. Electrified devices shall include the QEL feature at all rim-mounted applications. M. Exit devices shall be furnished with thru-bolts. N. Acceptable exit device applications: Rim and Surface Vertical Rod. Removal Mullion are not acceptable, unless it is the only approved application for a fire-rated pair DOOR HARDWARE

162 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 of doors. 2.9 DOOR TRIM UNITS A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units (kick plates, edge trim, viewers, knockers, mail drops and similar units); either machine screws or self-tapping screws. B. Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel, not more than 1/2" nor less than 1/16" smaller in length than door dimension. C. Fabricate protection plates (armor, kick or mop) not more than 2 less than door width on stop side and not more than 1 less than door width on pull side, x the height indicated. D. Metal Plates: Stainless steel,.050" (U.S. 18 ga.), bevel 3 edges: top and both sides GASKETS, DOOR BOTTOMS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide continuous weatherstripping at each edge of every exterior door leaf, except where stated the door manufacturer will provide the weatherstripping.. Provide type, sizes and profiles shown or scheduled. Provide non-corrosive fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. All gaskets for fire label doors shall comply the door manufacturers label approvals. Firelabel wood doors shall be furnished as Category A type with the intumescent seal, integrated into the door construction THRESHOLDS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated provide standard aluminum threshold unit of type, size and profile as shown or scheduled. B. Provide thresholds that are 1 wider than depth of frame. C. Provide thresholds with return closed ends where specified in Hardware Sets DOOR SILENCERS A. All hollow metal frames shall have gray resilient type silencers. Quantity (3) on single doors and quantity (2) on pair of doors Omitted 2.14 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. No key cabinet or key control system shall be specified for any MUSC project. PART 3 EXECUTION DOOR HARDWARE

163 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by Architect. B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces, which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in the Division-9 sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. C. Drill and countersink units, which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. D. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. E. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper installation and operation: Gaskets: install jamb-applied gaskets before closers, overhead stops, rim strikes, etc. F. Locate floor stops not more than 4 inches from the wall. G. Install closers and exit devices with the manufacturer s provided thru-bolts. Verify this mounting with the architect and the Owner. H. Certified Installers: Prior to installation of Locksets, Closers, and Exit Devices, hardware installers shall be trained by the manufacturers representative of each product. This training shall be conducted at the Pre-Installation Meeting at the project site. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units, which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in DOOR HARDWARE

164 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. E. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the acceptance of hardware in each area, the Installer, accompanied by the representative[s] of the Finish Hardware manufacturer[s], shall return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper function of doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items, which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of any current or predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware and furnish copy to Owners Agent / Representative. 3.3 HARDWARE SETS See following schedule. End Section DOOR HARDWARE

165

166

167

168

169 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 2. Vision lites 3. Entrances and other doors 4. Hollow metal construction 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing standard. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for the various size openings in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Minimum glass thickness, nominally, of lites is 0.25 inch. 2. Minimum glass thicknesses of lites, whether composed of annealed or heat-treated glass, are selected so the worst-case probability of failure does not exceed the following: GLAZING

170 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 a. 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not over 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. Determine minimum thickness of monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM E For other than monolithic annealed glass, determine thickness per glass manufacturer's standard method of analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E 1300 based on type of glass. C. Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass-framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on materials' actual surface temperatures due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 F deg, ambient; 180 F deg, material surfaces. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated. C. Samples For Single Glazing: For verification purposes of 12-inch square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12-inch long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. E. Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. G. Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating that glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials including sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks. GLAZING

171 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 H. Product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified. I. Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. SIGMA - Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association Publications: a. TM-3000 "Vertical Glazing Guidelines" b. TB-3001 "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 2. GANA - Glass Association of North America (formerly FGMA) Glazing Manual. a. Tempering Division - Engineering Standards Manual b. Laminating Division - Laminated Glass Design Guide B. Glass Standards 1. ASTM C1036 Standard Specification for Flat Glass (Formerly Federal Spec. DD-G- 451d) 2. ASTM C1048 Standard Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass, Heat Strengthened and Fully Tempered Coated and Uncoated Glass. (Replaces DD-G-1403) 3. ASTM C1172 Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass 4. ASTM C1376 Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Glass C. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Fire-Resistive Glazing Products for Door Assemblies: Products identical to those tested per ASTM E 152, labeled and listed by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier with Class CBA certification and who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project with a record of successful in-service performance. GLAZING

172 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 F. Single-Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated below: 1. Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class indicated. 2. Heat-treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition indicated. 3. Fire-Rated Glazing G. Single-Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. H. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to sealant manufacturers, samples of each glass, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect glazing sealants for compatibility and adhesion testing as indicated below: 1. Use test methods standard with sealant manufacturer to determine if priming and other specific preparation techniques are required for rapid, optimum glazing sealants adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates. 2. Testing is not required when glazing sealant manufacturer can submit required preparation data that is acceptable to Architect and is based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to and compatibility with submitted glazing materials. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1.9 WARRANTY A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. GLAZING

173 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide glass by one of the following:. 1. Class 1 (clear) unless otherwise indicated. a. AFG Glass. b. Guardian Industries Corp. c. Pilkington / TGP d. PPG Industries, Inc. e. Viracon 2.2 GLASS A. General 1. Horizontal Distortion: All tempered glass, including tinted, coated, and uncoated, shall have minimum horizontal distortion with minimum visible roller marks. All visible roller marks shall be in horizontal and run with the width of the glass. Horizontal distortion shall not exceed inch as measured with a roller wave gauge. 2. Specified glass performance is the minimum acceptable performance. Final glass tint will be as selected by the Architect from manufacturer s full range of standard and custom tints. 3. Refer to Drawings (Door & Frame Types) for Glazing Types B. Clear Tempered: ASTM C1048, Type 1 (transparent Float), Quality q3 (glazing select), Condition A (Uncoated), Kind FT (fully tempered), Class 1 (clear). C. Fire Resistant Glass 1. Non-Barrier To Radiant Heat: For glass that, according to applicable model building code and requirements of local governing authorities, does not need to be a barrier to radiant heat or meet to ASTM E119 or UL 263. Fire Resistant Glass under this category shall have the following properties: a. Manufacturer: FireLite Plus by Technical Glass Products or a reviewed substitute. b. Appearance: Clear. c. Thickness: As required to meet label of the opening, but not less that 3/16 inch. d. Visible Light Transmission: 88%. e. Visible Reflection: 9%. f. Fire Rating: 20 minutes up to 3 hours with hose stream test. GLAZING

174 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 g. Impact Safety Rating: Meets ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR1201 (Cat. 1 and 2). h. Positive Pressure: Pass test standard UL10C, UBC 7-2, and UBC 7-4. i. Withstand thermal shock j. Warranty: 3 years 2. Barrier to Radiant Heat: Where applicable model building code and of local governing authorities require glass to be a barrier to radiant heat and meet ASTM E119 and UL 263, provide clear, meeting ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR 1201 impact resistant safety standards. Pilkington Pyrostop or a reviewed substitute. Glass must be able to successfully pass the hose stream test. Glass thickness shall be based on the required rating and assembly as indicated in the following table. Rating Thickness (in.) Type Assembly Max. Exposed Area (sq. in.) Max. Width Exposed Area (in.) 45 Min. 3/4 inch Doors Min. 13/16 Walls Min 1-1/16 Doors Walls Min. 1-1/2 Doors Walls Min 2-1/8 Walls GLAZING TYPES A. Single Glazing: 1. Clear: 1/4 inch, tempered, clear. 3. Fire resistant glass 2.4 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and conditions existing at time of installation. GLAZING

175 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 3. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: a. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that comply with ASTM C 920 requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section, including those referencing ASTM classifications for Type, Grade, Class and Uses. 2.5 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent, nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces, with or without spacer rod as recommended by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, packaged on rolls with a release paper backing, and complying with AAMA 800. Select applicable product from following list to glazing conditions: 1. AAMA AAMA AAMA B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, polyvinyl chloride foam tape, factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces, packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive, and complying with AAMA 800 for product C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape Without Spacer Rod: a. For moderate movement (AAMA 804.1) 1) PTI 303 Glazing Tape (shimless), Protective Treatments, Inc. 2) S-M 5700 Poly-Glaze Tape Sealant, Schnee-Morehead, Inc. 3) Tremco 440 Tape, Tremco Inc. b. For large movement (AAMA 807.1) 1) Extru-Seal, Pecora Corp. 2) PTI 606 Architectural Sealant Tape, Protective Treatments, Inc. c. For limited movement (AAMA 806.1) GLAZING

176 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1) Dyna-Seal, Pecora Corp. 2) PTI 626 Architectural Sealant Tape, Protective Treatments, Inc. 3) S-M 5710 H.P Poly-Glaze Tape Sealant, Schnee-Morehead, Inc. 4) SST-800 Tape, Tremco, Inc. 2. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape With Spacer Rod: a. For moderate movement. 1) PTI 303 Glazing Tape (with shim), Protective Treatments, Inc. 2) Pre-shimmed Tremco 440 Tape, Tremco, Inc. 3) PTI 606 Architectural Sealant Tape, Protective Treatments, Inc. 3. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: a. Norseal V-980 Closed-Cell Glazing Tape, Norton Company. 2.6 GLAZING GASKETS A. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black. B. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, and compatible with sealants complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene, ASTM C EPDM, ASTM C Silicone, ASTM C Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C C. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below, and compatible with sealants complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene. 2. EPDM. 3. Silicone. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following companies. 1. Lock-Strip Gaskets: GLAZING

177 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 a. Stanlock Div., Griffith Rubber Mills. 2. Preformed Gaskets: a. Advanced Elastomer Systems, L.P. b. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. c. Tremco, Inc. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (sidewalking). F. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonextruding, nonoutgassing, strips of closed-cell plastic foam of density, size, and shape to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to produce optimum sealant performance. G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire-resistive rating. 2.8 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean cut or flat grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces. PART 3 - EXECUTION GLAZING

178 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase EXAMINATION A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows: 1. Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label. 2. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. GLAZING

179 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as follows: 1. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed by glass their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. GLAZING

180 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each lite is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. B. Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at corners to compress gaskets producing a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. C. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. 3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's printed recommendations. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 INSPECTION GUIDELINES FOR COATED GLASS GLAZING

181 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 A. Glass shall comply with ASTM C1376 and the following criteria when viewed from a bright and uniform background: B. Pinholes 1. Inspect from 10 feet 2. Pinholes larger than 1/16 inch diameter are unacceptable 3. Large clusters or close spacing of smaller pinholes are not acceptable in any area that a person would normally look through. Clusters are acceptable out of the normal viewing area. C. Scratches 1. Inspect from 10 feet 2. Scratches up to 3 inches long are acceptable. 3. Larger scratches are acceptable only if they are within 3 inches of the edge of the glass. 4. Concentrated scratches or abraded areas are not acceptable anywhere. D. Reflectance and Transmission: 1. Inspect from 10 feet 2. Uniformity: Some streaking or mottled appearance is acceptable 3. Distortion: Distortions of reflected objects are acceptable. 3.9 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION GLAZING

182 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For dimpled steel studs and runners, from ICC-ES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 Gauge inch ( mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 Gauge inch ( mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Page 1

183 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 Gauge inch ( mm). E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), inch- (1.72-mm-) thick, galvanized steel. F. Diagonal Bracing: 1. For walls that to not extend to the structure above, provide diagonal bracing to meet applicable seismic requirements. 2. Framing provider is to provide project specific calculations and list bracing requirements on submittal. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter. C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch (25 by 5 mm) by length indicated. D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Page 2

184 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 Gauge inch ( mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Page 3

185 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 1. Space studs as follows: a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. c. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Page 4

186 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within [1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m)] <Insert dimensions> measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Page 5

187 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 END OF SECTION NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Page 6

188 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Sound Attenuation Blankets 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. GYPSUM BOARD

189 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Moisture and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8, Type X 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer. 2. Core: 5/8, Type X 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. B. Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221 Alloy 6063-T JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. GYPSUM BOARD

190 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Laminating adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 1. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 10 percent. 2. Provide galvanized steel pin system to prevent settling. Space as recommended by manufacturer. D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according to ASTM E Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Acoustical joint sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS A. Comply with ASTM C 840. GYPSUM BOARD

191 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 2. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. E. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile 3. Level 3: Where walls are to be covered by a panel 4. Level 4: Where walls are covered with a wall covering a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section "Interior Painting." 5. Level 5: All walls with exposed painted finish a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section "Interior Painting." H. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. I. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD

192 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic tile. 2. Stone thresholds. 3. Crack isolation membrane. 4. Tile backing panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. TILING Page 1

193 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Samples: 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. C. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 inches (300 mm) square, but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. 3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 4. Stone thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. C. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. D. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. TILING Page 2

194 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. B. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Stone thresholds. 2. Crack isolation membrane. 3. Joint sealants. 4. Cementitious backer units. C. Mockups: Build full size mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of floor tile installation. 2. Build mockup of wall tile installation. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review requirements in ANSI A for substrates and for preparation by other trades. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. TILING Page 3

195 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C. FloorScore Compliance: Tile for floors shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard. D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS A. Tile Type TW-1 Porcelain Wall Tile 1. Product: See Drawings 2. Color: TBD 3. Module Size: 6 inch x 12 inch UNO (nominal). 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch 5. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 6. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes. B. Tile Type TF-1: Porcelain Floor Tile 1. Product: See Drawings 2. Color: TBD 3. Module Size: 6 inch x 6 inch UNO (nominal). 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 5. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. TILING Page 4

196 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 6. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes. 2.3 THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less above adjacent floor surface. B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. 1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained Grey solid stone. 2.4 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company; B 6000 Waterproof Membrane. b. C-Cure; Pro-Red Waterproofing Membrane 63. c. Custom Building Products; Redgard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane. d. Jamo Inc.; Waterproof. e. Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete Watertight Floor N' Wall Waterproofing. f. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic HPG. g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100 Crack Suppression and Waterproofing. h. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; HydraFlex - Waterproofing Crack Isolation Membrane. 2.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. TILING Page 5

197 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Urethane Crack Isolation Membrane and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part, liquid-applied urethane, with a VOC content of 65 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), in a consistency suitable for trowel application and intended for use as both waterproofing and tile-setting adhesive in a two-step process. 2.6 SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. C-Cure. d. Custom Building Products. e. Jamo Inc. f. Laticrete International, Inc. g. MAPEI Corporation. h. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, re-dispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for non-sagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A GROUT MATERIALS A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc. b. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. c. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. d. Bostik, Inc. e. C-Cure. f. Custom Building Products. g. Jamo Inc. h. Laticrete International, Inc. i. MAPEI Corporation. j. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. TILING Page 6

198 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 k. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. l. Summitville Tiles, Inc. m. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 deg F (60 deg C) and 212 deg F (100 deg C), respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; white zinc alloy exposed-edge material. B. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F (49 to 60 deg C) per ASTM D Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile. C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. Provide only if recommended by epoxy grout manufacturer. 2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. TILING Page 7

199 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tilesetting material manufacturer. B. Prepare floor substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. TILING Page 8

200 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 2. Decorative Thin Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." TILING Page 9

201 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 H. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not extend waterproofing or crack isolation membrane under thresholds set in latexportland cement mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on waterproofing or crack isolation membrane with elastomeric sealant. I. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. B. Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight. 3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove epoxy and latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging. B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. TILING Page 10

202 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION TILING Page 11

203 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product.. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. B. Evaluation reports. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

204 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 (Category D). B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class B materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 10 percent. B. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. C. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E D. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. E. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (ACT-1) A. Basis-of-Design Product (office areas): Subject to compliance with requirements, provide basis of design product or approved equal product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. Tectum Inc. 5. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B. Basis of Design: USG, Olympia Micro, ClimaPlus, 2x2 C. Color: White. D. LR: E. NRC: 0.75 Type E-400 mounting according to ASTM E 795. F. CAC: 35 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

205 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 G. AC: 180. H. Edge/Joint Detail: Square I. Thickness: 5/8 inch J. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2.4 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (ACT-2) A. Basis-of-Design Product (toilet / wet areas): Subject to compliance with requirements, provide basis of design product or approved equal product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. Tectum Inc. 5. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B. Basis of Design: USG, ClimaPlus, Vinyl, 2x2 C. Color: White. D. LR: 0.77 E. NRC: na F. CAC: 35 G. AC: 180. H. Edge/Joint Detail: Square I. Thickness: 1/2 inch J. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B. Tiles and grid are to be by same manufacturer to create a uniform system. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

206 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 C. Basis of design: 1. ACT-1 (offices): USG - Donn DX/DXL 2. ACT-2 (Toilets): USG - Donn DXLA D. Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 Interior coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy duty system (for category D). 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge] type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted color, White E. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Shadow Mold profile; manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

207 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. 10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows. a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 4. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners. 5. For Slot Diffuser provide continuous angle matching shape, finish and size of grid. Attach to adjacent wall construction. 6. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 7. Install hold-down or impact clips in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Compliance of seismic design. B. Perform the following tests and inspections of completed installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners in successive stages. Do not proceed with ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

208 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations show compliance with requirements. C. Acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

209 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. subfloor transition strips 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

210 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allstate Rubber Corp.; Stoler Industries. b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. c. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. d. Flexco, Inc. e. Johnsonite. f. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. g. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. h. PRF USA, Inc. i. Roppe Corporation, USA. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous) 3. Style: Cove (base with toe). C. Minimum Thickness: inch (3.2 mm) D. Height: 6 inches (4 under casework). E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside & Inside Corners: Preformed. G. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. H. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. I. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient sheet flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification. 2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Resilient Molding Accessory: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. b. Flexco, Inc. c. Johnsonite. d. R.C.A. Rubber Company (The). RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

211 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Material: Rubber. e. Roppe Corporation, USA. f. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division. C. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24. C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. D. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair tread manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

212 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish. C. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

213 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes modular CARPET TILE. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Section Resilient Floor Tile for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer s written data pn physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Existing flooring material to be removed. 3. Existing flooring materials to remain. 4. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 5. Type of subfloor. 6. Type of installation. 7. Pattern of installation. 8. Pattern type, location, and direction. 9. Pile direction. 10. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 11. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each sample with manufacturer s name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in Schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full size sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition and other accessory stripping: 12 long samples. D. Product Schedule: TILE CARPETING

214 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. For carpet tile. Use same designation indicated on drawings. E. Qualification Date: For Installer. F. Product test reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. G. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods or maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning, and stain removal products and procedures and manufacturer s recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and method that could be detrimental to carpet tile. H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. C. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section Project Management and Coordination. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review delivery, storage and handling procedures. 2. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. 3. Coordination with existing floor finishes to remain. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. TILE CARPETING

215 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE (must match existing) A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: B. Products: Refer to finish schedule. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. TILE CARPETING

216 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer s written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes, and depressions 1/8 wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer s written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive. E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. TILE CARPETING

217 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." Protection includes existing carpet in areas adjacent to new construction/installation. END OF SECTION TILE CARPETING

218 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION SPECIAL WALL SURFACING (GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) paneling for walls, including trim accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. General: Standards listed by reference form a part of this specification section. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation. Standards subsequently referenced in this Section are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D256 Standard Test Methods For Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics. 2. ASTM D570 Standard Test Method For Water Absorption of Plastics. 3. ASTM D638 Standard Test Method For Tensile Properties of Plastics. 4. ASTM D2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor. 5. ASTM D5319 Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Wall and Ceiling Panels. 6. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Technical Data: For each type of product required. B. Shop Drawings: Showing layout, profiles and product components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures. Indicate location and dimension of joints and fastener attachment. C. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics, criteria and physical requirements. D. Test and Evaluation Reports: Showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. SPECIAL WALL SURFACING (GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING)

219 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 E. Manufacturer s Instructions: Manufacturer s Installation Guide for FRP. F. Qualifications Statements: For manufacturer and installer. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For installed products including maintenance methods and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance. B. Warranty: Warranty documents required in this section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. At least five years experience in the installation of fiberglass reinforced plastic panels. 2. Experience on at least five projects of similar size, type and complexity as this Project. 3. Employer of workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for installation indicated. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 (Class A) or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. Package sheets on skids or pallets for shipment to project site. B. Storage and Handling: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. Store panels in a dry indoor location at Project site. Remove any foreign matter from face of panel by using a soft bristle brush, avoiding abrasive action. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Do not begin installation until building is enclosed, permanent heating and cooling equipment is in operation, and residual moisture from plaster, concrete or terrazzo work has dissipated. SPECIAL WALL SURFACING (GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING)

220 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. During installation, and within 48 hours prior to installation, maintain ambient temperature and relative humidity within limits required by type of panel adhesive used and recommendation of panel adhesive manufacturer. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace FRP panels that fail within specified warranty period. 1. Failures shall include, but not be limited to substantial defects in material and workmanship, rotting, rusting, corrosion, development of structural surface cracks, or requiring painting or refinishing. 2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty: Installer's standard form in which installer agrees to repair or replace FRP panels that fail due to poor workmanship or faulty installation within the specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PANELS A. General: Fiberglass reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D5319. B. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Crane Composites, Inc.; Innovative Finishes DESIGNS Wall Panel IPSA DESIGNS Class A Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Panels. C. Approved manufacturers: 1. Marlite 2. Crane Composites 3. Parkland Plastics D. Product Options: 1. Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 2. Surface Finish: Smooth. 3. Nominal Thickness: inch (1.9 mm). 4. Wall Panel Size: As indicated on drawings E. Performance Criteria (Class A Panels): 1. Flexural Strength: 12,000 psi (124 Mpa), ASTM D Tensile Strength: 7,000 psi (48 Mpa), ASTM D638. SPECIAL WALL SURFACING (GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING)

221 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 3. Barcol Hardness: 35, ASTM D Impact Strength (IZOD): 8 ft-lb/sq in (0.43 J/mm) ASTM D256, showing no visible damage on finish side. 5. Water Absorption: 0.16 percent in 24 hours at 77 deg F (25 deg C), ASTM D ACCESSORIES A. Moldings: PVC Pattern-matched to panel B. Panel Adhesive: As recommended by panel manufacturer for the required substrates. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Obtain fiberglass reinforced panels, moldings and other accessories from a single manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer s product data, including product technical bulletins, and installation instructions in product catalogs and product packaging. B. Verify that substrates previously installed under other sections are acceptable for product installation in accordance with FRP manufacturer s instructions. 1. Examine substrate surfaces to determine that corners are plumb and straight, that surfaces are smooth, sound and uniform, that nails or screw fasteners are countersunk, and that joints and cracks are filled flush and smooth with adjoining surfaces. 2. Do not begin panel installation until substrate surfaces are in satisfactory condition. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates to remove substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, dust or other contamination. B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space no less than 24 hours before installation. C. Lay out paneling before beginning installation. Locate panel joints to provide equal panel widths at ends of walls and so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide. SPECIAL WALL SURFACING (GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING)

222 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with panel manufacturer s Installation Guide #6876. B. Cut and drill panels, finished face down, with carbide tipped saw blades or drill bits, or cut with snips. C. Install panels with manufacturer s recommended gap for panel field and corner joints. 1. Pre-drill fastener holes in panels, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) greater in diameter than fastener. 2. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. For trowel type and application of adhesive, follow adhesive manufacturer s recommendations. D. Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails or staples. Do not fasten through panels. E. Sealant: 1. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. 2. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. B. Repair or replace any installed products that have been damaged. C. Clean installed panels in accordance with manufacturer s instructions prior to Owner s acceptance. D. Remove and lawfully dispose of construction debris from project site. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction. END OF SECTION SPECIAL WALL SURFACING (GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING)

223 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1.2 Related Requirements: 1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. C. Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. INTERIOR PAINTING

224 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. ICI Paints. 3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 4. Pratt & Lambert. 5. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. INTERIOR PAINTING

225 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/l. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/l. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/l. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/l. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/l. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/l. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/l. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/l. 9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/l. 10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/l. D. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule (See Drawings). 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50. B. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3. C. Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149. D. Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood: MPI #39. E. Primer Sealer, Alkyd, Interior: MPI #45. F. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17. G. Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based: MPI # WATER-BASED PAINTS A. Latex, Interior, Flat, (Gloss Level 1): MPI #53. B. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 3):MPI #52. C. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 4): MPI #43. D. Latex, Interior, Semi-Gloss, Gloss Level 5): MPI #54. E. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #143. INTERIOR PAINTING

226 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 F. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #145. G. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI # INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE General: Refer to the finish schedule for the type of required paint for a specific surface and select the applicable paint system from those specified. Where film thickness and spread rate are not listed, apply paints at manufacturer s published thickness and rate for specified paint. Review the specified painting systems and notify the Architect of any conflict between these systems and the painting manufacturer s recommendations. A. Steel Substrates: Including hollow metal doors and frames, misc. electrical conduit & devices, sprinkler pipes and fittings, plumbing pipes and fittings, and mechanical ductwork. 1. Alkyd System a. Prime Coat: Interior metal primer b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat c. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5) B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Alkyd System a. Prime Coat: Interior metal primer b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat c. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5) C. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System for Walls a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat c. Topcoat: Interior latex (eggshell) 2. Latex System for Ceilings a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat) D. Wood Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat c. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss) INTERIOR PAINTING

227 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer, but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." D. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. INTERIOR PAINTING

228 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. F. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. G. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. H. Dry Wall 1. Inspect dry wall in the presence of the General Contractor, drywall contractor and Architect to evaluate condition of drywall for painting. Ensure that all defects in drywall are corrected prior to primer application. 2. Brush or wipe down drywall surfaces with a damp (not wet) mop to remove all loose dust. 3. Evaluate drywall surfaces after primer has cured. Primer will highlight imperfections that must be corrected prior to application of top coats. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. INTERIOR PAINTING

229 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Paint Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work. 1. Paint the following work flat black where exposed in equipment rooms: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Metal conduit. e. Plastic conduit. f. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. 2. Paint the following work according to finish schedule, where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. INTERIOR PAINTING

230 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION INTERIOR PAINTING

231 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of visual display boards: 1. Porcelain enamel markerboards B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for each type of item required. Include sections of typical trim members and dimensioned elevations. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details. C. Samples: Provide the following samples of each product for initial selection of colors, patterns, and textures, as required, and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. 1. Samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and texture: a. Porcelain Enamel Markerboard: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of porcelain enamel finish showing the full range of colors available for each type of board required. b. Aluminum Trim and Accessories: Samples of each finish type and color, on 6 inch long sections of extrusions and not less than 4 inch squares of sheet or plate, showing the full range of colors available. VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

232 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is an authorized representative of the manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of the type of units required for this Project. 1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than 4 hours' normal travel time from the Installer's place of business to the Project site. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide units with surface burning characteristics indicated below, as determined by testing assembled materials composed of facings and backings identical to those required in this section, in accordance with ASTM E 84, by a testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 10 or less. C. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of visual display boards and are based on the specific type and model indicated. Other visual display boards having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. 1. Allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the Work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Porcelain Enamel Markerboard Warranty: Furnish the manufacturer's written warranty, agreeing to replace porcelain enamel boards that do not retain their original writing and erasing qualities, become slick and shiny, or exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking, provided the manufacturer's instructions with regard to handling, installation, protection, and maintenance have been followed. 1. Warranty Period: Lifetime of the building. VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

233 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards And Tackboards: 2.2 MATERIALS a. Alliancewall Corp. b. American Visual Display Products Inc. c. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. d. Greensteel, Inc. e. Nelson Adams f. Newline g. Peninsular Slate h. Platinum Visual Systems i. Polyvision j. School Specialty Inc. (Best-Rite) A. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: Provide balanced, high-pressure- laminated porcelain enamel boards of 3-ply construction consisting of face sheet, core material, and backing. 1. Face Sheet: Provide face sheet of 24-gage enameling grade steel especially processed for temperatures used in coating porcelain on steel. Coat the exposed face and exposed edges with a 3-coat process consisting of primer, ground coat, and color cover coat, and the concealed face with a 2-coat process consisting of primer and ground coat. Fuse cover and ground coats to steel at the manufacturer s standard firing temperatures, but not less than 1200 degrees F (649 deg C). a. Cover Coat: Provide the manufacturer's standard light-colored special writing surface with gloss finish intended for use with liquid felt-tipped markers. 2. Core: Provide the manufacturer's standard 3/8-inch-thick particleboard core material complying with the requirements of ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-M-1 3. Backing Sheet: Provide the manufacturer's standard inch-thick aluminum sheet backing. 4. Adhesives: Provide the manufacturer's standard moisture and mildew-resistant thermoplastic-type adhesive. Nonstaining for use with substrate application, as recommended in writing by visual display surface manufacturer. VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

234 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase ACCESSORIES A. Metal Trim and Accessories: Fabricate frames and trim of not less than inch thick aluminum alloy, size and shape as indicated, to suit type of installation. Provide straight, single-length units wherever possible; keep joints to a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure. 1. Where the size of boards or other conditions exist that require support in addition to the normal trim, provide structural supports or modify the trim as indicated or as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit the condition indicated. 2. Marker tray: Furnish the manufacturer's standard continuous, solid extrusion-type aluminum tray with ribbed section and smoothly curved exposed ends, for each board. 3. Map Rail: Furnish map rail at the top of each unit, complete with the following accessories: a. End Stops: Provide one end stop at each end of the map rail and tack strips. b. Display Rail: Provide continuous cork display rail approximately 2 inches wide, as indicated, integral with the map rail. c. Map Hooks: Provide 2 map hooks with flexible metal clips for each 4 feet of map rail or fraction thereof. 4. Install end caps at both ends of all tack strips to keep cork in place. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: Laminate facing sheet and backing sheet to core material under pressure with manufacturer's recommended flexible, waterproof adhesive. B. Assembly: Provide factory-assembled units, except where field-assembled units are required. 1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with the minimum number of joints, balanced around the center of the board, as acceptable to the Architect. 2. Provide the manufacturer's standard vertical joint system between abutting sections of board. 3. Provide manufacturer's standard mullion trim at joints between board. 2.6 FINISHES VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

235 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Class II Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A31 Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, nonspecular; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural, clear film. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Deliver factory-built units completely assembled in one piece without joints, wherever possible. Where dimensions exceed panel size, provide 2 or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to the Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site. Use splines at joints to maintain surface alignment. B. Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for a complete installation. C. Coordinate job-site assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories. Join parts with a neat, precision fit. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Verify that accessories required for each unit have been properly installed and that operating units function properly. B. Clean units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Break in markerboards only as recommended by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

236 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION PANEL SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Panel signs. 2. Room-identification signs. 1.2 SCOPE A. All signage is to be provided and installed by Owner, unless noted otherwise. B. GC is to provide schedule indicating when signage is to be available for installation. C. GC is to provide scheduled times when Owner may install the signage. D. Signage is required for a certificate of occupancy. END OF SECTION PANEL SIGNAGE

237 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION TOILET & BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Underlavatory guards. 3. Custodial accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. TOILET & BATH ACCESSORIES

238 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PUBLIC/PRIVATE-USE WASHROOM & CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Provide the following: 1. Bobrick (as shown in schedule) 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation. 4. Georgia Pacific (as shown in schedule) 5. GOJO (as shown in schedule) B. Schedule: See Drawings C. Scope: Many items are Owner Furnished and Contractor Installed. See drawings for scope of all accessories. D. See Door schedule for Coat hooks included on the interior face of each office door. 2.2 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS (All Locations in Scope) A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. Truebro by IPS Corporation. B. Underlavatory Guards (All Sinks): 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. TOILET & BATH ACCESSORIES

239 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf when tested according to ASTM F 446. C. Provide non-combustible blocking for all accessories as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION TOILET & BATH ACCESSORIES

240 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide: a. Potter Roemer LLC. ALTA Extinguisher Cabinets Model 7022-DV b. Steel, Semi-Recessed, factory painted white FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

241 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame C. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear). D. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semi-recessed cabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. B. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. D. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering as indicated and approved by AHJ and Owner. E. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. F. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

242 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

243 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide: a. Potter Roemer LLC.Fire Extinguisher Model Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. 2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS (non public access areas only) A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide: a. Potter Roemer LLC.Fire Extinguisher Model PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Install fire extinguishers in cabinets at locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. D. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

244 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Electrically-operated, projection screens B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for suspension systems for projection screens. 2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood backing for recessed screen installation. 3 Division 26 Sections for electrical wiring, connections, and installation of remote control switches for electrically operated projection screens. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of screen specified. C. Wiring diagram for electrically operated units. D. Shop drawings showing layout and types of projection screens. Show the following: 1. Location of screen centerline. 2. Location of wiring connections. 3. Connections to suspension systems for pendant-mounted and recess-mounted screens. 4. Anchorage details. 5. Accessories. PROJECTION SCREENS of 4

245 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of projection screen required from a single manufacturer as a complete unit, including necessary mounting hardware and accessories. B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of projection screens with other construction supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partitions. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed, other construction within spaces where screens will be installed is substantially complete, and installation of screens is ready to take place. B. Protect screens from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PROJECTION SCREEN SURFACES, GENERAL A. Measurement of Gain of Screen Viewing Surface: Measure gain of screen viewing surface against that of a magnesium carbonate surface by means of a photogoniometer using test methods and test apparatus per FS GG-S-00172D(1) for determining effect of reflected light at various viewing angles on screen surfaces. Ratings of 1.0 refer to those viewing surfaces having a reflectivity equal to the magnesium carbonate surface. B. Material and Viewing Surface of Front Projection Screens: Obtain screens manufactured from mildew- and flame-resistant fabric of type indicated for each type of screen specified and complying with the following requirements: 1. Matte white viewing surface with minimum gain characteristics complying with FS GG-S-00172D(1) for Type A screen surface. a. Application: Provide matte white surfaces. 2. Seamless Construction: Provide screens in sizes indicated without seams. 3. Mildew Resistance: Provide mildew-resistant screen fabrics as determined by Federal Standard 191A/5760. PROJECTION SCREENS of 4

246 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 4. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide projection screen fabrics identical to those materials that have undergone testing and passed requirements for flame resistance as indicated below: a. NFPA 701 per small-scale test. b. Federal Standard 191A/5903 for test method. FS GG-S-00172D(1) for flame resistance. 2.2 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard UL-listed and UL-marked units consisting of case, screen, motor, controls, mounting accessories, and other components required for a complete wall-mounted installation and to comply with requirements indicated for screen surface and controls and for case, motor, and screen under description of operation and type. Remotely control operation of each screen to comply with the following: 1. Single Station Control: Three-position, UL-listed control switch for each screen with metal device box and cover plate for flush wall mounting and for connection to 120 V a.c. power supply. B. Recessed, Motor-In-Roller-Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure: Units designed and fabricated for recessed installation in ceiling with bottom of case composed of two panels fully enclosing screen and wiring compartments, one panel hinged and activated by operation of screen to open and close automatically when screen is lowered and fully raised and the other panel removable or openable for access to interior of case; and complying with the following requirements: 1. Screen Case: Metal sides and top for both screen and wiring compartment and metal bottom panel, factory-primed and constructed as follows: a. Offset mount bottom panels to case in position where their bottom surfaces will align flush with finished surface of adjoining ceiling and the bottom edges of case surrounding panels will be recessed by the depth of, and concealed behind, overlapping ceiling finish. 2. Motor: Instant reversing motor of size and capacity recommended by screen manufacturer with permanently lubricated ball bearings, automatic thermal overload protection, preset limit switches to automatically stop screen in "up" and "down" positions, and positive stop action to prevent coasting. Mount motor inside roller with vibration insulators to reduce noise transmission. 3. Screen: As indicated below, with top edge mounted on, and securely anchored to, 3 inch (75 mm) diameter rigid metal roller supported by vibration- and noise-absorbing supports and bottom edge formed into a pocket holding a 3/8 inch (9 mm) diameter metal rod with ends of rod protected by plastic caps. PROJECTION SCREENS of 4

247 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 a. Material: Vinyl-coated glass fiber fabric, without seams. b. Size of Viewing Surface: inches wide Image Size (1.85:1 Aspect Ratio) with 3 of extra drop 4. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Rollfix Trapdoor," Bretford Manufacturing, Inc. b. "BoardRoom," Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc. c. "Envoy," Draper Shade & Screen Co., Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install projection screens at locations indicated in compliance with screen manufacturer's instructions. Provide trim as required. Paint exposed portion to match adjacent ceiling color, if not factory painted. B. Install projection screens with screen cases in position and relationship to adjoining construction as indicated, securely anchored to supporting substrate, and in manner that produces a smoothly operating screen with plumb and straight vertical edges and plumb and flat viewing surfaces when screen is lowered. 1. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen, controls, limit switches, closure and other operating components are in optimum functioning condition. 2. Test manually operated units to verify that screen operating components are in optimum functioning condition. 3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect projection screens after installation from damage during construction. If despite such protection damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in their original, undamaged condition. END OF SECTION PROJECTION SCREENS of 4

248 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements and all other Specification Sections apply to the work specified in this section. In the event of conflict between specific requirements of the various documents, the more restrictive requirement shall govern. 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Provide all materials, equipment, and labor, including all required drilling for the design, installation and modification of the existing supervised automatic sprinkler system(s) for the Medical University of South Carolina Clinical Science Building. B. The sprinkler system(s) shall be supplied from the existing automatic fire pump and served from existing sprinkler zone assemblies. Any new waterflow switches and valve tampers shall be furnished and installed under this contract. C. The piping for each system shall be sized in accordance with hydraulic calculations to comply with the hydraulic requirements found in NFPA Standard and the Owner's Insurance Underwriter Standards. D. All core drilling of floors and walls shall be included under this contract. All electrical work related to this contract shall be provided under Division 26, Electrical. E. Secure all required approvals and inspections from City of Charleston and the State of South Carolina. F. Submit all required drawings and calculations. G. All work must be performed in accordance with these specifications and other related documents. H. Contractors shall be solely responsible for design and installation of the system(s) in accordance with the specifications. 1.3 INTENT OF SPECIFICATIONS A. The work performed shall be complete in every respect. Each system that has been installed or modified shall be complete in accordance with the applicable codes, standards, University s Insurance Underwriter requirements, manufacturer's FIRE PROTECTION

249 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase SCOPE recommendations and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) listings. B. Upon completion of this work, the Owner shall be provided with the following: 1. Complete information and record drawings describing and depicting all systems as installed, including all information necessary for maintaining, troubleshooting, and expanding the systems. 2. Complete documentation of system testing. 3. Certify that each system installed or modified has been inspected and tested, has been installed or modified entirely in accordance with the applicable code, standards, Manufacturer's recommendations and UL listings, and is in proper working order. Contractor shall use "Contractor's Material and Test Certificates for Aboveground Piping and Underground Piping". A. The requirements of Division 23, Sections Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions and Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to work specified under this section. B. The area of work shall be fully sprinklered throughout in accordance with NFPA Standard Provide new automatic sprinkler protection in accordance with NFPA Standard , except as made more stringent herein. C. Provide sprinkler system supervisory switches and waterflow indicators as required. All electrical work related shall be provided under Division 26, ELECTRICAL. D. Provide all required drains and inspector test connections, connected and ready to use. E. Prepare and submit shop drawings, record drawings, and other submittals required herein. F. Flush and test the sprinkler and standpipe systems. G. Warrant all new equipment, systems, and modifications during installation for a one (1) year period after final acceptance of the work by the Architect. H. Provide all required drilling for sprinkler, standpipe and water supply piping. I. Pipe sizes shall be as required by NFPA Standards but in no case less than those shown on the drawings. For the Contractor's information, fire flow test data is hereinafter included. J. Sprinkler heads shall be provided as required by NFPA Standards. Sprinkler head locations shall be coordinated with the Architectural reflected ceiling plans. Sprinkler shop drawings shall indicate the ceiling grid, lighting fixtures, air devices, etc. Sprinkler heads shall be centered in tiles, plus or minus two (2) inches from tile centerlines. FIRE PROTECTION

250 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 K. Provide specialty heads, shut-off valves with tamper switches on sprinkler pipes serving special use areas, such as elevator shafts, elevator machine rooms, electric rooms, etc. as required by local code and the authority having jurisdiction. L. All requirements of the State of South Carolina, the State Fire Marshal's Office, and the City of Charleston Fire Prevention Bureau shall apply to this specification. Provide systems according to NFPA M. The sprinkler contractor shall provide all required construction coordination as specified in Division 23, Section Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions. All coordination issues and conflicts shall be resolved by the Contractor(s) at no additional cost to the Owner. Resolutions may include, but not be limited to, moving pipe mains, sprinkler heads, drain and test piping, valves, etc. 1.5 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Provide and install all piping as required by NFPA Standards and approved plans in accordance with all applicable standards. Piping installation and hangers shall be in accordance with Division 23, Section Basic Materials and Methods, unless specified otherwise in this Section. B. Electrical power supply to the system control panel(s), interlock wiring and conduit for shutdown of HVAC, dampers and/or electric power supplies, relays or shunt trip breakers, and connection to local/remote fire alarm systems, listed central alarm station(s) or sprinkler preaction/deluge valve actuation shall be provided under other sections of this specification. 1.6 WORKING CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for attending a pre-construction meeting and construction coordination meetings with the Owner and Architect. 1.7 CODES, STANDARDS, ORDINANCES, AND PERMITS A. All work shall conform to the requirements of the applicable portions of the latest editions of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards and Recommended Practices listed herein: 1. NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2010 Edition 2. NFPA 25: Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems, 2011 Edition 3. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code, 2008 Edition 4. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code, 2010 Edition 5. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code, 2009 Edition. 6. The Fire Protection Sprinkler Systems Act. SC Code of Laws Title 40 Chapter 10. FIRE PROTECTION

251 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. All work and materials shall conform to all Federal, State, and local codes and regulations governing this installation including the current editions of the International Building and Fire Prevention Codes, and the International Building Code, as modified or interpreted by the State of South Carolina to permit use of current NFPA Standards. C. All designs, work, and materials shall conform to the Owner s Insurance Underwriter guidelines and standards. D. If there is a conflict between the referenced NFPA Standards, Federal, State or local codes, Insurance Underwriter requirements, and this specification, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to bring the conflict to the attention of the Architect for resolution. E. All devices, systems, equipment, and materials furnished and installed shall be of types or models approved by City of Charleston, the State of South Carolina and Underwriters Laboratories for use in systems and occupancies of this type. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR A. The Contractor shall hold all licenses and obtain all permits necessary to perform work of this type. B. The Contractor shall be regularly engaged in the design, installation, testing, and servicing of automatic sprinkler systems. C. The Contractor shall provide a job site supervisor who shall be present at all times that work is actively in progress. 1.9 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. The Owner and Architect or their representative(s) will review all submittals for conformance to these specifications. 2. If the Contractor's submittals, upon review by the Owner or Architect do not conform to the requirements of these specifications, the Contractor shall be required to resubmit with modifications, within seven (7) working days of receipt of the Architect's notification to the Contractor. 3. If the Contractor's submittals conform to the requirements of these specifications, the Engineer of Record will issue a Certificate of Compliance. Subsequently, the Fire Sprinkler System Specification Sheet and Certificate of Compliance will accompany the shop drawing submittal to the State Fire Marshal for review and approval. B. Hydraulic Calculations 1. The contractor shall submit hydraulic calculations based on the information FIRE PROTECTION

252 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 provided on the Fire Sprinkler Specification Sheet (FSSS). C. Shop Drawings: 1. The Contractor shall submit sufficient quantity of AutoCAD prepared shop drawings, catalog cuts, and hydraulic calculations to the Architect for approval. Shop drawings shall show light fixtures, ducts, mechanical equipment, structural elements, and all other items which may affect the layout of sprinkler heads and piping. Plans showing sprinkler work shall be not less than 1/8 inch per foot. a. The AutoCAD prepared shop drawings shall be consistent and compatible with AutoCAD format being used by the Architect. b. Shop drawings shall show all of the information required by NFPA Standard for working plans and shall include drawings showing the location of all equipment, controls, piping, valves, and drains. c. Shop drawings shall show locations of pipe supports, seismic braces and end-of-line pipe restraints in plan view. Shop drawings shall also detail pipe supports, seismic braces and end-of-line restraints. d. The shop drawings shall indicate all areas to be sprinklered and type of hazard, locations and sizes of water supply pipe, major drains and tests, alarm check valve and water motor gong, risers and other main piping and valves, and the location of fire department connections. Complete riser diagrams shall also be submitted. The drawings shall locate by dimension all fire protection piping and sprinkler heads. e. Shop drawings shall be provided in sufficient detail to show compliance with the Standards referenced on the Fire Sprinkler System Specification Sheet (FSSSS) to the degree required by the regulations of the State Fire Marshal. f. Provide all electrical wiring diagrams of flow switches, alarms, and supervising equipment for coordination under Division 26, ELECTRICAL. All wiring shall be provided under Division 26, ELECTRICAL. D. Samples: 1. Submit to Architect one sample of each type of sprinkler head to be provided. Samples shall be retained by the Engineer. E. Operation and Maintenance Manual 1. Refer to Division 23, Section Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions for additional requirements of operation and maintenance manuals. The Contractor shall provide the Architect with a loose-leaf manual containing the following data: a. A detailed description of the new sprinkler system(s). b. A detailed description of routine maintenance required or recommended including a maintenance schedule and detailed maintenance instructions for each type of device installed. c. Manufacturer's data sheets and installation manuals/instructions for all equipment installed. d. A list of recommended spare parts. e. Service directory for all components in the system. f. Eleven (11) inches by seventeen (17) inches reduced copies of the as-built FIRE PROTECTION

253 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 drawings. 2. Within thirty (30) days of the completion of the work, six (6) copies of the approved manual with as-built drawings and a copy of NFPA-25 shall be delivered to the Owner. F. Record Drawings: 1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the site an up-to-date record set of approved shop drawing prints which shall be marked to show each and every change made to the sprinkler system from the original approved shop drawings. This shall not be construed as authorization to deviate from or make changes to the shop drawings approved without written instruction in each case. This set of drawings shall be used only as a record set. 2. Upon completion of the work, the record set of prints shall be used to prepare complete, accurate final record drawings (CAD) reflecting any and all changes and deviations made to the sprinkler system. 3. Upon completion of the work, one set of black line record drawings shall be submitted to the Architect for review and approval. 4. Upon approval of the black line record drawings, four (4) additional sets of black line record drawings and one set of unprotected AutoCAD 2006 disks shall be delivered to the Owner. G. Drawing Approval by Code Authority: 1. The Contractor s shop drawings are subject to approval by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) WARRANTY PERIOD A. The Contractor shall provide a one (1) year warranty for all materials and workmanship beginning with the date of substantial completion. The Contractor shall be responsible during the design, installation, testing, and warranty periods for any damage caused by him or his subcontractors or by defects in his or his subcontractors' work, materials, or equipment TRAINING A. The Contractor shall conduct one training session of four (4) hours to familiarize the building personnel with the features, operation, and maintenance of the sprinkler systems. Training sessions shall be scheduled by the Architect at a time mutually agreeable to the Contractor and the Owner. B. The proposed training agenda shall include, but not be limited to, the following items: 1. Overview of system operation 2. Overview of system equipment and device locations 3. Detailed operation guidelines 4. Detailed maintenance procedures 5. Periodic testing procedures FIRE PROTECTION

254 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. Spare Parts: Contractor shall install one (1) metal sprinkler cabinet containing a minimum total of six (6) sprinklers, of each type, finish, and temperature rating used on the project. Contractor shall provide two (2) sets of sprinkler wrenches compatible with each type of sprinkler provided. The cabinet shall be installed at the locations approved by the Owner FINAL APPROVAL AND ACCEPTANCE A. Final approval and acceptance of the work will be given when the following occurs: 1. The complete sprinkler system(s) have been inspected, tested, and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 2. Required submittals, system operation and maintenance manuals, record drawings, spare parts, special tools, and training have been provided to, reviewed, and accepted by the Owner and Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Hydraulically calculated wet-pipe and single interlocked preaction sprinkler systems shall be installed, designed to produce uniform discharge over the design area, and shall conform to the hydraulic requirements of NFPA Standard , the FSSS and to the requirements as specified herein. The following density requirements apply. 1. Light Hazard areas, the density required must be calculated from the Light Hazard density curve in NFPA Standard , with a minimum area of application of 1,500 square feet. The suggested density is 0.10 gpm per square foot over the hydraulically most remote 1,500 square feet in administration, toilet rooms, public areas and corridors. 2. The design calculations shall include an allowance for hose streams and a ten (10) pound per square inch safety factor for future water supply deterioration. B. Contractor shall follow the hydraulic design criteria contained in the NFPA Standard as interpreted by the State of South Carolina and the Owner's Insurance Underwriter and as shown on the FSSSS. C. Contractor shall furnish and install hydraulic calculation signs for each sprinkler zone. 1. Signs shall include all information indicated in Appendix A, NFPA Standard Signs shall be rigid, flat steel or aluminum plaques with embossed enamel background and lettering. 3. Signs shall be secured by chain or durable wire to each sprinkler zone control valve. FIRE PROTECTION

255 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase GENERAL 2.3 PIPING A. All equipment and system components furnished and installed shall be new and of first quality, and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) or approved by Factory mutual (FM) for their intended use. All such equipment and system components shall be installed within the limitations of the respective UL listings or FM approvals. B. Each item of equipment shall be capable of performing its function over an extended period of time with a minimum of attention and maintenance. All equipment shall be constructed using new materials designed and built in accordance with the best practices of the industry. Each major item of equipment shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark; serial number; UL label; operating instructions and hydraulic temperature characteristic conditions, etc., if applicable. C. Unless specified otherwise, the standard manufactured products of Grinnell, Viking, Reliable or equal shall be provided. Equipment and installation shall comply with NFPA Standards A. Fire protection system piping shall meet the requirements of NFPA Standard and the following: 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe meeting ASTM A-795 requirements with the following: a. Black cast-iron screwed fittings 125 pound steam, 175 pound water ANSI B16.4 and threaded joints conforming to ANSI B b. Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings for roll or cut pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger. c. Plain-end pipe coupling and fittings for pipe sizes one (1) inch through two (2) inches. 2. Pressure ratings of all fittings shall meet or exceed maximum working pressures available within the system. 3. If piping systems utilizing mechanical couplings are used, all coupling and pipe fittings such as elbows, tees, reducers, etc. (not including valves and specialties) shall be provided by one manufacturer and shall be part of a UL/FM approved assembly. B. Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fittings 1. Manufacturer: FlexHead Industries, Inc. or equal 2. Description: Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fittings for use in commercial suspended ceilings and sheetrock ceilings. 3. Regulatory Requirements: In accordance with NFPA Product Performance Criteria: a. FM Approved for its intended use pursuant to FM 1637 Approval Standard for Flexible Sprinkler Hose with Threaded End Fittings. b. UL Listed for its intended use pursuant to UL 2443 Standard for Flexible FIRE PROTECTION

256 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 Sprinkler Hose with Fittings for Fire Protection Service. c. Seismically qualified for use pursuant to ICC-ES AC-156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Qualification by Shake-Table Testing of Nonstructural Components and Systems. 5. FlexHead Flexible Hose Assemblies and End Fittings: a. 100% Type 304 Stainless Steel. b. Straight Hose Assembly Lengths: 2ft length, Model #2024, 175 psi maximum rated pressure. Fully welded non-mechanical fittings, braided, leak-tested with minimum 1-inch true-bore internal corrugated hose diameter. c. Elbow Hose Assembly Lengths (For use in confined spaces): 2ft length, Model #2024E, 175 psi maximum rated pressure. Fully welded nonmechanical fittings, braided, leak-tested with minimum 1-inch true-bore internal corrugated hose diameter. 6. FlexHead Ceiling Bracket: a. Type G90 Galvanized Steel. b. Direct attachment type, having integrated snap-on clip ends positively attached to the ceiling using tamper-resistant screws. c. Flexible Hose Attachment: Removable hub type with set screw. C. UL Listed Flexible Expansion Loop 1. All fire protection pipe passing through or crossing building seismic or expansion joints shall contain a UL listed flexible expansion loop, designed for seismic movement. Flexible loops shall impart no thrust loads to building structure. 2. Loops shall be located at, or near, the building seismic or expansion joint. Seismic bracing shall not pass through building seismic joint and shall not connect or tie together different sides or parts of building structure. Flexible loops shall be capable of movement in the ±X, ±Y, ±Z planes. Movement requirements and location, relative to seismic separation, shall be determined by system design engineer. Flexible loops may be installed to accommodate thermal expansion, seismic movement, and building settlement. Unless specified otherwise by system design engineer or governing codes, all flexible loop connections to sprinkler piping shall be installed, inspected, and tested in accordance with NFPA standards. 3. Flexible loops shall consist of two flexible sections of hose and braid, two 90 degree elbows, and 180 degree return. Loops shall include a factory supplied, center support nut located at the bottom of the 180 degree return, and a drain/air release plug. Materials of construction and end fitting type shall be consistent with pipe material and equipment/pipe connection fittings. 4. Flexible expansion/seismic loops shall be equal to Metraloop Fireloop as manufactured by Metraflex Company or equal. 2.4 CONTROL AND DRAIN VALVES A. Fire Protection system control valves shall be the following types: 1. Gate Valves 2-1/2 inch and over shall comply with UL 262, 175 pounds per square inch (psi) water working pressure (WWP), OS&Y with cast iron body and flanged FIRE PROTECTION

257 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 end equal to Stockham Fig. No. G Gate Valves 2 inch and under shall comply with UL 262, 175 pounds per square inch (psi) water working pressure (WWP), OS&Y with bronze body and screwed end equal to Stockham Fig. B Check Valves 2-1/2 inch and over shall comply with UL 312, 175 pounds per square inch (psi) water working pressure (WWP), swing check with cast iron body and flanged end equal to Stockham Fig. G-939. For vertical installations, provide wafer check valve compliant with UL 312, 175 psi WWP equal to Tyco. 4. Butterfly valves with integral valve supervisory switches, whose entire assembly is approved for use in sprinkler systems for pipe sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller. 5. Ball drips shall be Elkhart Fig. No B. Riser control valves shall be of the OS&Y gate type with valve supervisory switch. C. All valves must be UL listed or FM approved for their intended use. D. All water supply control valves and drain valves shall be permanently marked to show their function and sprinkler system zone which they serve. Valve marking shall correspond to campus wide valve marking procedure. E. Pressure ratings of all valves shall meet or exceed maximum working pressures available within the system. F. Provide inspector's test and drain assemblies. G. Provide check valve in accordance with NFPA Standard AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS A. Sprinklers shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and only new sprinklers shall be used. Any sprinkler that incurs damage, is painted, or is sprayed with any fire retardant or obstructive material shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. Sprinklers shall be provided and installed in accordance with NFPA Standard and properly coordinated with other work including duct and electric fixture installation. The correct type of sprinkler head shall be used in every location. B. The correct temperature rating of every sprinkler head shall be used according to the maximum ceiling temperature rating and requirements in NFPA Standard All sprinklers with the exception of specified decorative types and bulb type sprinklers shall have their frame arms colored at the factory in accordance with the standard table in NFPA Standard High temperature heads shall be used where required by NFPA Standard and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. Sprinklers that may be subject to mechanical damage due to their location (under stairwells, or low hanging sprinklers in corridors, storage rooms or under ducts) shall be provided with approved guards (Reliable Model MA or equal). Sprinklers under open FIRE PROTECTION

258 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 gratings shall be provided with approved shields. D. Automatic sprinklers shall be of the following types: 1. Quick Response sidewall, semi-recessed pendent or concealed sprinklers shall be installed in all areas, including offices, corridors, storage rooms, and other technically appropriate areas. Sprinkler heads in gypsum, plaster and wood ceilings shall be concealed type. Sprinkler heads in acoustical ceiling tile shall be semi-recessed pendent type. Quick Response sprinklers shall be ordinary temperature rated. All sprinklers in these areas shall be Quick Response which will permit removal and replacement of ceiling without cutting tiles. 2. Standard upright or pendent sprinklers shall be installed in areas not provided with Quick Response Sprinklers. 3. Architect will select finish for all automatic sprinklers from samples of available finishes supplied by Contractor from the manufacturer. 4. All sprinklers within a space shall be from the same manufacturer and have the same heat response element, including temperature rating and response characteristics. 5. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to install all sprinklers securely and in a manner acceptable to the Owner and Architect. 2.6 SUPERVISORY AND ALARM EQUIPMENT A. Vane-type waterflow indicators with adjustable pneumatic retard (0-90 seconds) shall be used to indicate waterflow in each sprinkler system zone. B. Valve supervisory switches (riser control valves) shall be provided for all new valves controlling the water supply to the sprinkler system(s) and standpipes. C. Valve supervisory switches shall be the yoke mounted type. Contractor shall not use remote mounted, wire loop type switches. D. All electrical wiring of flow switches and valve tamper switches into the fire alarm system shall be provided under Division 26, ELECTRICAL. The sprinkler contractor is responsible for providing, installing, and adjusting the devices as necessary for proper operation. E. All valves controlling water supply shall be electrically supervised in accordance with requirements of IBC 2012 Section and NFPA Standards. The switches shall be a single circuit limit switch mounted to the piping so that when the valve is fully opened the limit switch actuator holds the contacts open. If the valve is closed to a point where the stem has reached a distance of 1/5 of total travel to the closed position, the limit switch actuator shall close to the switch contacts. 2.7 HANGERS A. Provide hangers from the building structure in strict accordance with NFPA Standard 13- FIRE PROTECTION

259 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase FLOW SWITCHES Provide seismic bracing and supports for all fire protection piping to comply with NFPA Standard Submittal shall detail seismic bracing and pipe supports and show locations of each. All pipe supports and seismic bracing shall be of UL listed components. Engineered pipe supports will only be allowed if shop drawings containing calculations according to NFPA Standard ( ) are approved by the AHJ prior to the start of installation. A. Approved water flow switches (Potter Model VSR, VS-SP, or equal) shall be installed where indicated. Conductors shall be provided under Division 26, ELECTRICAL to provide fire alarm and annunciation. Activation of the sprinkler system by one (1) sprinkler or equivalent test shall cause the fire alarm system to activate and the appropriate lamp(s) to activate on the annunciator. An approved test shall be provided for each water flow switch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. The contractor shall examine daily all areas in which the work will be performed. The Contractor shall immediately report unsatisfactory working conditions to the Architect for resolution. The Contractor shall not proceed with work until all unsatisfactory working conditions have been resolved. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. The Contractor shall thoroughly review with the Architect pipe routing, sprinkler location, and method of installation. Any facet of sprinkler installation that does not meet with the Owner's approval shall be revised by the Contractor to the Owner's satisfaction at no expense to the Owner. 2. Due to the need to maximize area availability, each zone may be constructed in phases requiring multiple hydrostatic tests, set-up, clean-up, etc. 3. All holes made by the Contractor in any new wall, ceiling, or floor shall be patched restoring the wall, ceiling, or floor to its original appearance, condition, fire resistance, and integrity. 4. Location of all equipment, controls, piping, valves and drains shall be coordinated with other sections and trades so as to be easily accessible for operation and maintenance. Location is subject to approval. 5. All sprinklers and equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. All special tools recommended by the manufacturer shall be used. 6. The sprinkler contractor shall provide all required construction coordination as specified in Division 23, Section Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions. All coordination issues and conflicts shall be resolved by the Contractors at no additional cost to the Owner. Resolutions may include, but not be limited to, FIRE PROTECTION

260 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 moving pipe mains, sprinkler heads drain and test piping, valves, etc. B. Installation of Piping: 1. Install all pipe, fittings, valves, controls, and hangers as indicated and required in accordance with NFPA Standard Piping installed under this Section shall be coordinated with that of all other Sections and trades so that all work may be installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner and so that interference between piping, ducts, equipment, electrical, architectural and structural features will be avoided. 3. Piping shall be installed and arranged to protect it from freezing and corrosion, and shall be pitched for drainage. Installation of all piping shall be in coordination with air devices, ductwork, light fixtures, and any other work that may obstruct sprinklers. 4. Drains and test piping shall be furnished and installed so that all parts of the system may be drained and tested properly. Low point drains shall be clearly marked and piped to the exterior of the building. A sign be provided in the existing fire pump room of the number and location of the low point drains. 5. All risers including the alarm check valve shall be equipped with drains with sizes as specified in NFPA Standard The alarm check valve drain ("main drain") shall be piped to the outside of the building at a point free from causing water damage. 6. An alarm test connection not less than 1 in. in diameter, terminating in a smooth bore corrosion resistant orifice, giving a flow equal to or less than one sprinkler of a type having the smallest orifice installed on the particular system, shall be provided to test each waterflow alarm device for each system. The discharge should be at a point where it can be readily observed. Obtain Architect's approval for each discharge location. 7. All valves controlling water supply for sprinklers shall be accessible for use by emergency and maintenance personnel. All valves controlling water supply for sprinklers shall be electrically supervised and shall be red in color or painted red by the sprinkler subcontractor. 8. All sprinkler piping installed in areas with suspended ceiling shall be concealed in the walls and ceilings. 9. All exposed pipe which passes through a wall, ceiling, or floor shall be provided with escutcheon plates. 10. All exposed piping, equipment, and devices shall be installed as high as possible, but no less than 7'-6" above the finished floor, and so as not to obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway or passageway, and shall not interfere with the operation or accessibility of any mechanical, plumbing, or electrical equipment. 11. Pipe which passes through fire-resistive barriers (including shaft walls and stairways) shall be sleeved and grouted to maintain the structural integrity and rating of the fire-resistive barriers. C. System Drains: 1. Discharge from inspector's test pipe and system drains shall be extended and terminated outside with a Zurn Z199-DC-VP or approved equal downspout cover, or with an indirect connection over an open drain. Discharge locations shall be FIRE PROTECTION

261 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 approved by the Architect. 2. All interior sectional control valves including riser control valves shall be provided with auxiliary drainage so located as to drain that portion of the system controlled by the sectional valve. These drains shall discharge either outside, to drain connection leading to the main drain, or to a drain system. Obtain approval of all discharge locations. 3. Auxiliary drains shall be provided to properly drain points of the system when a change in direction prevents drainage. 4. Drain and auxiliary drain valves shall be globe or angle valves as required and readily accessible for maintenance personnel. The Inspector's test shall be one (1) inch or larger globe valve installed not over seven (7) feet above the floor and in a readily accessible location. Test valves and the sight test shall be located at readily accessible points not above seven (7) feet above the floor. D. Flexible Couplings, Hangers, and Sway Bracing: 1. Provide pipe hangers and supports for fire protection piping as hereinbefore specified in Division 23, Section Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions and in no case less than the requirements of NFPA Standard All sprinkler piping shall be substantially supported from the building structure which must support the total load of the water filled pipe plus a minimum of 250 pounds applied at the point of hanging in accordance with NFPA Standard All hanging apparatus and equipment shall be of an approved type installed in accordance with NFPA Standard All flexible couplings shall be designed and installed as required by NFPA Standard (including all appendices). Flexibility, internal pressure, and differential movement between the piping and building, earth, or other supporting structure(s) shall be allowed for, so that no allowable stress is exceeded in any member. 4. All sway bracing shall be designed and installed as required by NFPA Standard Sprinkler contractor shall provide two-way, four-way, lateral, longitudinal, etc. bracing for seismic protection. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identification signs similar to or the same as those recommended in NFPA Standard shall be affixed securely by chain to all valves. The signs shall be red in color (Reliable Model A, Style A and B, or equivalent). The main drain sign shall be labeled "MAIN DRAIN". Riser drains shall read "RISER DRAIN" or "DRAIN". Auxiliary drain signs shall be labeled "AUXILIARY DRAIN". Inspector's Test's signs shall be labeled "INSPECTORS TEST". B. All water supply control valves shall have a standard sign identifying the portion of the system controlled, noting that the valve must be kept open, and leaving a blank space for notification information. All valves which are placed in concealed spaces shall have the standard sign affixed in a visible location (valves hidden by a drop ceiling shall have a sign mounted on the ceiling or wall under the valve). Obtain final approval of the Architect of all sign locations in finished spaces. FIRE PROTECTION

262 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 C. A fire sprinkler valve drawing shall be provided to identify the locations, details of arrangements and function of all system valves, including control, drain, test, inspection valves. One (1) copy of the drawing shall be mounted and framed under plastic protection in the fire pump room (location per Architect). 3.4 INSTALLATION, ACCEPTANCES, AND TEST A. Installation, tests, and acceptance shall be in accordance with all applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Installation shall be in accordance with all applicable codes, including the Occupational Safety and Health Acts. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors. C. The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Architect for final inspection and witnessing of the final acceptance test. The Architect or the Owner will conduct a final inspection and witness the final acceptance test. D. The hydrostatic tests shall be documented and subject to third party witness. Failure to document any test or notify the Architect may require retesting at no cost to the Owner. E. All tests and inspections required by the referenced Codes and Standards, the Owner, AHJ, and the Architect shall be performed by the Contractor. 1. When local code authorities or third parties are required to witness tests, the contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary arrangements with the code authorities and coordinating the work with the Architect. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all test documents with necessary approval stamps and signatures for the code authorities. The Contractor shall submit one copy of the Contractors Material and Test Certificates for Aboveground Piping with all information filled out and original signatures. F. An Owner's Representative will visit the job site to inspect the work and witness acceptance tests when he has been advised by the Contractor that the work is completed and ready for test. If the work is not complete or the test is unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall be responsible for the Representative's extra time and expenses for reinspection and witnessing the re-testing of the work. Such extra fees shall be deducted from payments to the Contractor. G. Contractor shall provide at least five (5) working days notice for all tests. As a minimum the following test shall be provided: 1. All piping shall be tested hydrostatically at not less the 200 pounds per square inch (psi) for two (2) hours. The hydrostatic test pressure shall be measured at the low point of the system. The hydrostatic test shall be for the entire system as installed and specified. 2. All alarm equipment, drainage facilities, inspector's tests, etc., shall be operated while the control valves are wide open. The main drain shall be opened and FIRE PROTECTION

263 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 remain open until the system pressure stabilizes. All air shall have been bled from the system at the top inspector's test connection prior to these tests. H. The following materials shall be furnished by the Contractor at the conclusion of the final acceptance test: 1. Operating and maintenance instructions. 2. The spare sprinklers hereinbefore specified. 3. Any and all special tools noted by the manufacturer required for the fire protection items furnished. I. After completion of installation and tests, clean interior and exterior surfaces of equipment and materials, painted or unpainted, installed under this section of specifications of dirt, rust, loose scale, oils, grease and other foreign matter. 3.5 MATERIAL HANDLING A. Storage: 1. The General Contractor will provide the Contractor with a storage space for the Contractor's use during this project. The Contractor will be responsible for the security of this space. 2. The material storage area may be used for pipe cutting and threading, and component assembly. 3. Overnight storage of material shall be limited to the assigned storage area. Materials brought to the work area shall be installed the same day, or returned to the assigned storage area unless otherwise previously approved by the General Contractor. B. Receiving and Handling: 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for all receiving, handling, and storage of his materials at the job site. 2. Use of loading docks, service driveways shall be coordinated with the Owner. C. Rubbish Removal: 1. Contractor shall remove rubbish and debris resulting from his work on a daily basis. Rubbish not removed by the Contractor will be removed by the General Contractor and back-charge to the Contractor. 2. Removal of debris from the premises shall be coordinated with the General Contractor. 3.6 WELDING AND FLAME CUTTING A. Welding or flame cutting by the Contractor shall be permitted on the premises in accordance with 2012 edition IFC chapter 35. FIRE PROTECTION

264 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase EXISTING FIRE PUMP FLOW TEST DATA A. Refer to Fire Sprinkler System Specification Sheet. END OF SECTION FIRE PROTECTION

265 Fire Sprinkler System Specification Sheet (Per ) Project Data Project name: MUSC Medical University of South Carolina CSB 7 th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 Location in South Carolina: Address (street # & street name): 96 Jonathan Lucas Street State project: Yes No City: Charleston County: Charleston State project #: H51-N332-PG Water Supply Information (flow test data must be less than 1 year old per (A)(1)) Date test conducted: 02/18/2014 Static pressure (psi): Residual pressure (psi): Flow (gpm): Distances of test gauges relative to the base of the riser: Horizontal (ft): Vertical (elevation difference in ft): Source of water supply: Municipal dead-end Municipal circulation Other: Pipe Size (in.): Test data by/from: Name: Sean Dougherty Title: Fire Sprinkler Inspection Manager Organization: Liberty Fire Protection, Inc. Telephone #: Fire pump: Yes No Pump Capacity (gpm): 1,250 Churn Pressure (psi): 122 Net as tested New Existing Rated Pressure (psi): % flow (psi): Not tested due to low city pressure. Maximum tested to 109 psi at 1,223 gpm On-site storage tank: Yes No New Existing Tank capacity (gallons): NFPA Hazard Classification (attach continuation page when necessary) Area # Class or Code Reference Description of Hazard Protected (commodity description, storage height, and arrangement as applicable.) 1 Light Hazard Offices, Conference Rooms, Corridors, Restrooms, Janitors Closet Design Parameters (attach continuation page when necessary) Area # System Type Density (gpm/ft 2 ) / Area (ft 2 ) or Other (reference code section) Inside Hose (gpm) Outside Hose (gpm) 1 Automatic Wet 0.10/ Seismic Design Data: S S =1.475 Codes and Standards (attach continuation page when necessary) Applicable Codes, Standards & Editions (i.e. "2006 IBC", "2007 NFPA 13", etc.) for the Scope of Work on the Sprinkler System ICC IEBC (2012), ICC IBC (2012), ICC IFC (2012), NFPA-13 (2010), NFPA-20 (2010) Scope of work (such as sprinkler system A.G. from 1'-0" A.F.F., U.G. from tap to 5'-0" outside, etc.) and notes (attach continuation page when necessary): Renovation of existing fire protection system to accommodate new architectural layout of a portion of the 7 th floor. Specifier's Information Name: Craig Buck, P.E. Engineering services provided through a firm: Yes No Firm name: RMF Engineering, Inc. Address: 194 Seven Farms Drive, Suite G City: Mount Pleasant State: South Carolina Zip: Phone #: Fax #: craig.buck@rmf.com Certificate of Authorization Professional Engineer s Seal Revision No.: 0 Page 1 of 1 Signature: Date:

266 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SCOPE A. The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements and all other Specification Sections apply to the work specified in this section. In the event of conflict between specific requirements of the various documents, the more restrictive, the more extensive (i.e.: more expensive) requirement shall govern. A. This section includes the waste, drain, vent and domestic water systems from their source of supply or point of disposal to and including their connection to equipment and fixtures. B. The requirements of Division 23, Sections Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions shall apply to all work specified under this section. Sterilization shall comply with Section 610 of the 2012 International Plumbing Code. C. Contractor shall coordinate required water and sanitary services with the general contractor. 1.3 CODES A. All plumbing work shall comply with the 2012 International Plumbing Code and the regulations of the South Carolina Department of Health and Environmental Control (DHEC), and the State of South Carolina. Obtain all approvals before starting plumbing work. Request all inspections during the course of work. B. Installation shall meet the regulations contained in the Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA) concerning lead and copper concentrations. C. All residential type faucets, electric water coolers and drinking fountains shall meet the requirements of NSF Standard 61, Section EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide all plumbing connections required by equipment which is provided on this project. Certain items of equipment shall be provided under this section and certain items will be furnished and set under other sections of the specifications. In all cases, provide valved water supplies, waste and vent lines, and, unless noted otherwise, make final connections after equipment is in place. PLUMBING

267 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE, VALVES AND FITTINGS A. Provide materials as hereinbefore specified in Division 23, Section Basic Materials and Methods. All floor, wall and ceiling penetrations for piping shall be sealed with appropriate sealant. B. Unions or flanges shall be provided at all connections to each piece of plumbing equipment and on both sides of valves and other in-line devices that require removal for maintenance. Bronze adaptors shall be used at all copper to flanged or IPS connections. 2.2 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts shall be placed in piping throughout the building, where noted and where required by code and at not greater than seventy five (75) foot intervals. Cleanouts on piping below floors, at ends of runs and changes of direction of piping shall consist of Y branches, the full size of pipes to which they are connected with cleanout plugs and covers as listed below or as detailed. Extend cleanouts on concealed piping to finished walls, floors and grade. Cleanouts shall be Josam, Zurn or J.R. Smith equal to Josam numbers indicated below. B. In concrete floors on grade (generally) - Series SQ cleanout with scoriated square satin nikaloy top, bronze cleanout plug with gasket seal, and adjustable frame. C. At base of vertical piping and in walls - Series Z cleanout tee with countersunk bronze threaded plug. Where risers are concealed, provide Series cleanout tee with plug and nickel satin access cover and frame. D. Cleanouts on exposed and above ceiling horizontal piping shall be Series with bronze threaded plug. E. Provide cleanouts in each exposed P-trap not integral with the fixture. F. Clean-outs shall be the same nominal size of the pipe for sizes 4 and smaller and 4 nominal size for larger pipe. 2.3 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Provide all plumbing fixtures indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. All exposed metal parts of all fixtures, including all trim and fittings, shall be brass, chromium plated. Each hot and cold water connection to each fixture shall be provided with a stop valve and all nipples shall be chrome plated red brass. Provide backflow devices on all faucets and fittings requiring same. Devices may be inline type when not provided integral with the faucet. All faucet handles, where possible, shall have color PLUMBING

268 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 coded "indexes" identifying the service used. All "serrated" or slip hose connection spout outlets shall have Allen wrench operated volume controls to control "splashing" of water as it hits sink bottoms. Water supplies for handicapped lavatories and sinks shall be insulated. Waste line for handicapped lavatories and sinks shall be offset and insulated. Refer to Division 23, Section Mechanical Insulation for insulation type and thickness. B. Water supplies for handicapped water closets shall be roughed-in for flush valve handles to be operated from the accessible side of the water closet. The Contractor shall coordinate and provide flush handles on the accessible side of all handicapped water closets. Provide offset flush connection as required to coordinate with wall mounted grab bars to all ADA water closets with flush valves. C. The Contractor shall provide metal supports necessary to adequately and substantially hang and set all fixtures subject to the approval of the Architect. No wood grounds, wood plugs, or expansion bolts shall be permitted for fixture support. Provide carriers where specified below and as required to hang fixtures. D. Insulate all exposed piping under lavatories and sinks with a white, fitted/molded antimicrobial undersink pipe cover equal to Truebro Lav Guard 2. Cover shall have internal, E-Z Tear-To-Fit trim feature for square, clean trimming (internal ribs) and builtin, concealed E-Z Grip fasteners (no cable-tie fasteners allowed). E. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Fixture shall be American Standard, Crane or Kohler. 2. Flush valves shall be Zurn, Sloan, Delany or Cambridge Brass. 3. Faucets shall be Sloan, Kohler, Chicago Faucet, T & S Brass, Crane, Eljer or American Standard equal to Sloan of the types listed below. 4. Toilet seats shall be Bemis (Church), Beneke, Sperzel. F. Fixtures: 1. P-1 Water Closet: Fixture: Flush Valve: Seat: Remarks: Kohler Wellworth model K-4406, low consumption, high efficiency toilet at 1.28 gallons per flush. ADA compliant. Zurn AquaVantage, Model Z6000Av-HET (top spud) exposed, diaphragm type water closet flushometer. Bemis, model 1655CT, open front. Floor mounted, elongated bowl, vitreous china, 1-1/2 inlet. Installation shall meet the American with Disabilities Act guidelines and ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities (16-1/2 mm height). Contractor shall verify and PLUMBING

269 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 coordinate rough-in locations. 2. P-2 Lavatory: Fixture: Faucet: Strainer: Trap: Kohler model K-1997 Wall-hung Lavatory. Kohler, model K-7443 deckmount, 4 centers, manual hand washing faucet with 4 wrist blade handles. McGuire 155-WC cast brass chrome plated offset wheelchair strainer with polished chrome cast brass elbow, 17 gauge 1-1/4 inch seamless brass offset tailpiece, heavy rubber basin washer and fiber friction washer. Offset lavatory strainer shall be in compliance with CSA or other recognized testing authority and bear both manufacturer and testing mark. McGuire 8872 cast brass chrome plated 1-1/4 x 1-1/4 P-trap with cleanout with 17 gauge tubular wall bend, cast brass slip nuts. Trap shall be in compliance with CSA and bear both manufacturer and testing mark Supplies and Stops: Chicago Faucet No Carrier: Remarks: Zurn Z1231 Wall Mount. Faucets require below deck thermostatic mixing valve equal to Chicago Faucets 131-ABNF and shall conform to ASSE 1070 or CSA B Contractor shall verify and coordinate rough-in locations. 3. P-3 Break Room Sink: Fixture: Faucet: Strainer: Trap: Kohler model K , top mount Kitchen Sink. Kohler, model K-7825 deckmount, 4 centers, manual hand washing faucet with 4 wrist blade handles. McGuire 155-WC cast brass chrome plated offset wheelchair strainer with polished chrome cast brass elbow, 17 gauge 1-1/4 inch seamless brass offset tailpiece, heavy rubber basin washer and fiber friction washer. Offset lavatory strainer shall be in compliance with CSA or other recognized testing authority and bear both manufacturer and testing mark. McGuire 8872 cast brass chrome plated 1-1/4 x 1-1/4 P-trap with cleanout with 17 gauge tubular wall bend, cast brass slip nuts. Trap shall be in compliance with CSA and bear both manufacturer and testing mark PLUMBING

270 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 Supplies and Stops: Chicago Faucet No Remarks: InSinkErator Model Evolution Excel with multigrind plus and soundseal plus technologies, 1.0 HP motor, auto-reverse grind system, stainless steel grind chamber and components. Contractor shall verify and coordinate rough-in locations. 4. P-4 Cold Water Outlet Fixture: Remarks: IPS Guy Gray Model MIB1HA ice maker outlet box 20 gauge box and 20 gauge faceplate, white powder coat on cold rolled steel finish, 1/4 turn ball valve with 1/2 sweat connection and hammer arrester. Provide plumbing connections in accordance with manufacturer s written instructions. Contractor shall verify and coordinate rough-in locations. 5. P-5 Mop Sink Fixture: Faucet: Strainer: Remarks: Fiat Model MSB-3624, molded stone Chicago Faucet No. 897-CP, atmospheric vacuum breaker spout with pail hook, wall brace and 3/4" male garden hose thread outlet. 2-3/8" metal lever handles with eight-point tapered broach and secured, color-coded index buttons. Fiat 1453-BB flat type stainless steel Fiat E-77-AA vinyl bumper guard, Fiat 889-CC mop hanger and stainless steel wall guards. Contractor shall verify and coordinate rough-in locations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING A. Interior Drainage Systems: 1. Soil, waste, vent, and drain piping for sanitary and storm drainage, shall be of the sizes noted, and shall be run as indicated. Pipes must be run in straight lines and have a uniform grade between elevations noted. No branch drain shall have a grade less than that indicated for the main drain to which it is connected. Where elevations are not given, horizontal pipes shall have a uniform grade of 1/4 inch per foot where possible but in no case less than 1/8 inch per foot and shall be installed to the inverts shown. All piping shall be adequately supported as PLUMBING

271 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 specified in Division 23, Section Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions. All main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be extended as vents full size to approximately 18 inches above the roof of the building. Two (2) or more vent lines shall be connected together where practicable and extended as one (1) pipe through the roof. Vent pipes in roof spaces shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the roof without forming traps in pipes. Vent pipes may be connected to other vent pipes or to main vent stacks provided the connections are at least four (4) feet above the floor on which the fixtures are located so that no vent pipe can be used as a waste. Openings in roof for vent pipes shall be flashed and made watertight. Use vent stack flashing sleeves where applicable. Handicapped plumbing fixtures shall be rough-in to suit the specific mounting of the fixture. Waste lines shall be offset for lavatories and sinks to accommodate wheelchair type strainers and traps shall be insulated. 2. Changes in direction shall be made by appropriate use of forty-five (45) degree wyes, 1/2 wyes, or long sweep 1/4, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends. Sanitary tees or short quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical; except use long turn tee wyes when two (2) fixtures have common drain. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Make no change in direction of flow greater than ninety (90) degrees. Where different sizes of drainage pipes or pipes and fittings are to be connected, use standard increasers and reducers of proper size. Reduction of size in horizontal drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. 3. Drilling and tapping of drains, soil, waste, or vent piping, and use of saddle hubs and bands are prohibited. 4. Connect piping to fixtures or equipment by couplings or unions so that devices may be replaced with no disturbance to piping. B. Water Piping Systems: 1. Water piping shall be complete from service connection to all fixtures, equipment, outlets, etc. Sizes of pipes shall be shown or as specified. 2. Chromium plated piping shall be threaded and made up carefully, and not more than one (1) full turn of thread shall be exposed beyond any fitting. 3. Ends of pipes or tubing and recesses of fittings to be bronzed or soldered shall be thoroughly cleaned. Joints shall be assembled without binding. Brazing material or solder shall penetrate fully and shall fill the joint completely. 4. All brass and copper pipe and tubing shall be free from cuts, dents or other surface damage at the time of final inspection. Damaged pipe or tubing shall be removed and replaced with new pipe or tubing. 5. Horizontal runs of brass and copper pipe and tubing over fifty (50) feet in length shall be anchored to wall or floor construction. Anchors shall be located near the midpoints of the runs so as to force the expansion equally to the ends or in a direction where expansion can take place without excessive strain. Swing joints, offsets, expansion joints, etc., shall be provided where necessary to accommodate expansion of piping, which will be approximately two (2) inches in 100 feet of brass or copper hot water piping. 6. Where non-ferrous metal piping and zinc-coated metal piping are jointed, PLUMBING

272 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 dielectric (insulating) couplings, fittings or unions shall be provided. 7. Where pipe sizes shown or specified differ from the connection sizes of meters, pumps, fixtures, outlets, etc., reducing fittings shall be installed. 8. Water supplies for wall hung lavatories shall be roughed in as high as possible and still permit connections to the faucet. Water supplies shall be insulated for handicapped fixtures and rough-in shall be on accessible side of fixture for flush valves and flush handles. C. All rough-in plumbing shall be sealed off with test plugs, caps, etc., until fixtures are ready to be installed. 3.2 CLEANOUTS 3.3 TRAPS A. Where soil, waste, or roof drainage risers connect to a sewer or drain extending from the building above the lowest floor, the fitting at the base of each stack or downspout shall be a sanitary tee or a combination Y and 1/8 bend with cleanout plug in the end of the run of the main. B. Each vertical soil, waste, and vent pipe and each downspout and roof drainage pipe which connects to horizontal drain piping below ground shall be fitted with a test tee above the lowest floor or ground. Where accessible, test tee may be installed in the horizontal pipe at the base of the riser. A. Each fixture and piece of equipment connected to the sanitary system shall be equipped with a trap. Provide traps for storm water lines where required by code. Each trap shall be placed as close to the fixture as possible and no fixture shall be double trapped. All traps on bell and spigot pipe shall be extra heavy cast iron and all traps on threaded pipe shall be galvanized cast iron recessed drainage type. END OF SECTION PLUMBING

273 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SCOPE A. The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements and all other Specification Sections apply to the work specified in this section. In the event of conflict between specific requirements of the various documents, the more restrictive, the more extensive (i.e.: more expensive) requirement shall govern. A. This Section describes the general provisions for the fire protection, plumbing, mechanical and electrical work included in Divisions 21, 22, 23 and 26 respectively. This section applies to all sections of Divisions 21, 22, 23 and 26. Refer to Division 26 for additional General Provisions related to electrical work. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITY A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for all work included in the Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection Divisions. The delegation of work to Subcontractors shall not relieve him of this responsibility. Subcontractors who perform work under these Sections shall be responsible to the General Contractor. The term "Contractor" is used throughout this Division and shall mean the General Contractor, although the actual performance of the work may be by a Subcontractor. B. Within thirty (30) days after award of the contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect, for approval a list of all subcontractors names he proposes to use. C. The Contractor shall carefully review all divisions of the project specifications. Where conflicts exist between divisions and/or sections of the specifications the most stringent requirement as determined by the Architect shall apply. D. The contractor shall obtain and pay for all installation permits, certificates, and inspection fees relative to the work. The preparation of any specific plans or shop drawings necessary to obtain these permits shall also be the responsibility of the contractor. 1.4 REFERENCES AND DEFINITIONS Following are definitions of terms and expressions used in the Mechanical and Electrical Sections: MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

274 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 Provide - furnish and install Directed - directed by the Architect Indicated - indicated in Contract Documents Concealed - hidden from normal sight; includes items within furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, above suspended ceilings and within return air plenums. Exposed - non concealed - Work within Equipment Rooms shall be considered exposed. Exterior - items being or situated outside. Items located within a crawl space shall be considered exterior. Conditioned - a heated or cooled space, or both, within a building and, where required, provided with humidification or dehumidification means, so as to be capable of maintaining a space condition falling within the comfort envelope set forth in ASHRAE 55. Piping - includes pipes, fittings, valves, hangers, and accessories comprising a system Ductwork - includes ducts, fittings, housings, dampers, hangers, air devices, and accessories comprising a system. 1.5 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS A. See Division 1 - General Requirements. B. References to catalogs, standards, codes, specifications, and regulations apply to the latest edition in effect at the date of the invitation to bid. 1.6 CODES, REGULATIONS, AND PERMITS: A. Give all necessary notices, obtain all permits, and pay all fees and other costs, including those for utility connections or extensions in connection with the work. File all necessary plans, prepare all documents, and obtain all necessary approvals of all governmental departments having jurisdiction. Obtain all required certificates of inspection and deliver same to the Architect before request for acceptance and final payment for the work. B. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the latest rules, regulations, and recommendations of the following bodies: 2012 International Building Code 2012 International Existing Building Code 2012 International Mechanical Code 2012 International Plumbing Code 2012 International Fire Code 2009 International Energy Code National Electric Code, 2008 Edition National Fire Protection Association Standards (Latest Editions) MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

275 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 State Fire Marshal Regulations Fire Prevention Bureaus of the City of Charleston, Charleston County and the State of South Carolina ASHRAE Standards and Handbooks (Latest Editions) Local Health Department State Health Department Local Utility Companies Underwriters Laboratories Owner's Insurance Underwriter Standards Environmental Protection Agency 1.7 MATERIALS LIST AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. See Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for Additional Requirements related to submittals and shop drawings. B. Prior to delivery of any material or equipment to the job site; submit for approval, dimensioned drawings or cuts showing construction size, arrangement, operating clearances, performance characteristics, and capacity of material or equipment. Each item of equipment proposed shall be a standard catalog product of the approved manufacturer. Submittals shall be received early in the construction period to allow the Architect ample time for review and checking for compliance with the contract documents. The Architect will be expected to process a maximum of ten (10) submittals in a five (5) day working period. The Contractor shall carefully schedule the submission time of all submittals to insure that approvals will be received to meet the critical path of the construction project. C. If the Contractor's submittals, upon review by the Architect, do not conform to the requirements of the contract documents, the contractor shall be required to resubmit with modification, within fifteen (15) working days of receipt of the Architect s notification and comments to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for the extra expenses for subsequent review of rejected or revised submittals necessitated by the Contractor's failure to provide a complete and accurate submittal meeting the requirements of the contract documents. Such extra fees shall be deducted by the Owner from payments to the Contractor. D. Samples, drawings, specifications, catalogs, etc., submitted for approval shall be properly labeled indicating specific item, model number, and service for which material or equipment shall be used. Section and article number of specifications governing, Contractor's name, name of job, and date and also be clearly indicated on all submittals. Submittals that are not properly labeled or identified will be returned marked "Not Reviewed". E. Catalogs, pamphlets, or other documents submitted to describe items on which approval is being requested shall be specific. Identification in catalog, pamphlet, etc., of item submitted shall be clearly made in ink. Data of a general nature will not be accepted. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

276 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 F. If material or equipment is installed prior to receipt by the Contractor of pertinent shop drawings marked "No Exceptions Taken" or "Comments Noted", the Contractor shall be liable for its removable replacement at no extra charge to the Owner. G. Prepare and submit shop drawings for all specifically fabricated items, modifications to standards items, specially designed systems where detailed design is not shown on the contract drawings, or where the proposed installation differs from that shown on contract drawings. H. Submit data and shop drawings as listed below, in addition to provisions of paragraphs above. Identify all shop drawings by the name of the item and system and applicable specification paragraph number. Shop Drawings: Section Fire Protection AutoCad Shop Drawings Record Drawings Site and Final Inspection Forms Valve Tag Drawing Hydraulic Calculations Piping Automatic Sprinklers Pipes and Fittings Hangers Sprinkler System Drawings and Calculations Sprinkler System Acceptance Test Statement Section Plumbing Cleanouts Plumbing Fixtures Section Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions Record Drawings Installation and Coordination Drawings Pipe and Conduit Hangers and Supports Access Doors Sleeves and Penetrations Drawings Operation and Maintenance Manuals List of Manufacturers' Material and Equipment Section Basic Materials and Methods MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

277 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 Hangers and Pipe Shields Identification Items Pipe, Fittings, and Joints Balancing Valves Ball Valves Drain Valves Check Valves Manual and Automatic Air Vents Strainers Test Plugs Dielectric Fittings Unions Test Reports Sterilization Report Section Mechanical Vibration, Sound and Seismic Controls Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraint Components Section Testing and Balancing Test Reports Section Mechanical Systems Insulation All Insulation Types Adhesives, Sealers, and Coatings Fabric Jackets Fitting and Valve Covers Metallic Components Section Building Automation and Temperature Control System Sensors Thermostats Transmitters Gauges and Thermometers Control Valves Operators Control Panels Receiver Controllers Fire and Smoke Control Devices Electronic Components Software Field Hardware Automatic Temperature Control System MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

278 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 Section Air Distribution Air Terminal Units Air Devices Air Filters and Holding Frames Dampers: Volume Fire Damper Ductwork I. Contractor, additionally, shall submit for approval any other shop drawings as requested by the Architect. No item listed above shall be delivered to the site, or installed, until approved. After the proposed materials have been approved, no substitution will be permitted except where approved by the Architect. 1.8 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION A. No equipment shall be operated, for testing or trial use, before full compliance with the equipment manufacturers' specifications and instructions for the lubrication, alignment, direction of rotation, balance, and other applicable considerations. B. Particular care shall be taken to see that all equipment is completely assembled, properly lubricated, and all grease and oil cases and reservoirs have been filled to the correct level with the recommended lubricants. C. It is the Contractor's responsibility to place each item of equipment, installed by him, in operating condition. This responsibility includes all auxiliaries, piping, wiring, etc., the start up of each unit, and a check of its performance. 1.9 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty, by his acceptance of the Contract, that all work installed, by him or his subcontractors, will be free from defects, in workmanship and materials, for a period of one (1) year after the date of certification of completion and acceptance of work. Any defects in workmanship, materials or performance which appear within the guarantee period shall be corrected by the Contractor, without cost to the Owner, within a reasonable time to be specified in notice from the Architect. In default thereof, Owner may have such work done and charge the cost of same to the Contractor DRAWINGS A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work included in the Contract. Any offsets, rises, or transitions not shown on the drawings and required to provide a complete system shall be provided at no additional contract cost. Do not scale the drawings. Consult the Architectural and Structural drawings and details for exact location of structure and equipment; where same MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

279 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase RECORD DRAWINGS are not definitely located, obtain this information from the Architect. A. Contractor shall keep accurate records of all deviations in work, as actually installed, from work indicated. B. When work is complete, make two (2) complete "Record" sets of marked-up prints, certify the accuracy of each print by endorsement and signature thereon. Deliver same to the Architect who will, after approval, deliver these two (2) sets to the Owner OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Upon completion of all work and all tests, Contractor shall furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for operating the systems and equipment for a minimum period of four (4) days of eight (8) hours each, or as otherwise specified. During this period, Contractor shall instruct the Owner's representative fully in the operation, adjustment, and maintenance of all equipment furnished. At least forty-eight (48) hours in advance written notice shall be given to the Owner. B. Contractor shall furnish to the Architect four (4) complete bound sets of typewritten or blueprinted instructions for operating and maintaining all systems and equipment included in this Contract. Operating and maintenance manuals shall include all construction test reports, final balancing reports, valve tag schedule, final inspection certificates, and occupancy permits. Also provide two (2) complete bound sets of approved shop drawings for all items of equipment utilized on the project. All instructions shall be submitted in draft for approval prior to final issue. Manufacturers' advertising literature or catalogs will not be acceptable for operating and maintenance instructions. C. Instructions shall include a general description of each system and specific instructions describing routine and emergency procedures required of the building personnel for operating and maintaining each system. The instructions shall include the name or label, location, and function of all operating equipment and controls, such as start-stop switches, time clocks, and safety and temperature controllers. Operating modes and the procedures for indexing each mode shall be clearly described. A listing of names, addresses, and phone numbers of the service organizations for each item of equipment and a typewritten maintenance schedule for same shall be included. D. The instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation on which he is to give instruction. The instructor shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Employ factory trained instructors for automatic temperature control systems and wherever else necessary, as determined by the Architect. E. During the warranty period, the Contractor shall service and maintain all equipment, excluding filter replacement, provided under this contract. Prior to the start of guarantee MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

280 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 period, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a schedule of required maintenance operations for each system and items of equipment. Contractor shall submit schedule to the Architect for approval. Thereafter, monthly reports shall be submitted to the Owner describing actual service provided. Forty-eight (48) hours advance notice shall be given to the Owner, prior to work required under this Section. F. Contractor shall provide the Owner with all tools required to service and maintain all equipment ELECTRICAL WORK A. Under Divisions 22 PLUMBING and 23 MECHANICAL, provide the following items of electrical work which shall conform with the applicable requirements of the Electrical Division: 1. Low voltage temperature control wiring. 2. Interlock wiring for mechanical equipment and devices. B. Under Division 26 ELECTRICAL, provide: 1. Power wiring, complete from power source to motor or equipment junction box, including power wiring through motor starters, power factor correction devices, and line reactors. Power factor correction devices shall be provided under Division 23 and installed under Division Motor control centers or motor starter, panelboards. 3. All miscellaneous individual motor starters, unless noted or specified otherwise SINGULAR NUMBER A. Where any device or part of equipment is herein referred to in the singular number (such as "valve"), such reference applies to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be new, the best of their respective kinds, suitable for the conditions and duties imposed on them at the building, and shall be of reputable manufacturers'. The description, characteristics, and requirements of materials to be used shall be in accordance with qualifying conditions established in the sections following. B. See Division 1 - General Requirements. All component parts of each items of equipment or device shall bear the manufacturers' name plate; giving name of manufacturer, description, size, type, serial or model number, electrical characteristics, etc., in order to MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

281 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 facilitate the maintenance or replacement. The name plate of a subcontractor or distributor will not be acceptable. Where Underwriters' Laboratories standards apply, material and equipment shall be approved by them and shall bear the UL Label. C. In specifying materials, three (3) general procedures are used. The three (3) classifications are as follows: GROUP 1: When a material or equipment is specified by brand name or other identifying information and three (3) or more brands are named it is considered that any one (1) of the brands so named will perform as desired, and the Contractor shall base his proposal on one (1) of the named brands. The first brand named or identified basis of design shall be used as a standard. The other brands named shall be equal to the specified brand in all respects. If one (1) of the other brands named is used it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify proper clearances and fit of the substituted equipment. GROUP 2: When the material or equipment is specified with the phrase "...or approved equal..." after a brand name and other identifying information, it is intended that the brand name is used for the purpose of establishing a minimum acceptable standard of quality and performance and Contractor may base his bid proposal on any item which is in all respects equal to that specified and presents essentially the same appearance. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure proper fit and clearances of all substituted equipment. GROUP 3: When material is specified as complying with the requirements of published "Standard Specification" of trade associations, American Society of Testing and Materials, government specifications, etc. the Contractor shall base his proposal on any item which can be shown to comply in all respects to the referred "Standard Specification". 1. It is distinctly understood: (1) that the Architect will use his own judgment in determining whether or not any materials, equipment or methods offered in substitution are equal to those specified; (2) that the decision of the Architect on all such questions of equality is final; and (3) that all substitutions will be made at no increase in cost to the Owner. 2. Upon receipt of written approval from Architect, Contractor may proceed with substitution providing Contractor assumes full responsibility for, and makes, at his own expense, any changes or adjustments in construction or connection with other work that may be required by the substitution of such materials, equipment or methods. In the event of any adverse decisions by the Architect no claim of any sort shall be made or allowed against the Owner. 2.2 INSTALLATION AND COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare, submit and use composite installation and coordination drawings to assure proper coordination and installation of work in all buildings. No installation or construction work shall begin until the coordination drawings are completed, submitted, and approved. Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Complete Floor Plans MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

282 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. Mechanical Rooms in the Building B. Show relationship and integration of different construction elements that require coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in space provided and function as intended. C. Prior to fabricating or installing work, prepare composite coordination drawings at appropriate scale; detail major elements, components, and systems of architectural, structural, mechanical, and electrical such as equipment, components, and materials in relationship with each other, installations, and building components. Include dimensions. Composite coordination drawings shall include new and existing elements, components, and systems. D. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are important to efficient flow of Work. E. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into building during construction. F. Assembly Penetrations: Prepare drawings as required to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to assembly construction, other penetrations and installations. Identify where additional bracing and offsets are required to comply with Contract Documents. G. Prepare drawings as required to coordinate and integrate ceiling installations, air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communications systems components, sprinklers, other ceilingmounted devices, components located above suspended ceilings, and suspended ceiling support components. H. Show interrelationship of components indicated on separate Shop Drawings. I. Indicate required installation sequences to minimize cutting and patching. J. In addition, prepare coordination drawings required below and in other Specification sections. K. Mechanical Systems: Include, but do not necessarily limit to, the following: 1. Proposed locations of piping, ductwork, equipment, and materials. 2. Proposed locations for access panels and doors. 3. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. 4. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter re-moval, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. Show access locations. 5. Equipment connections and support details, including vibration isolation, seismic MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

283 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 and sway bracing. 6. Exterior wall, roof and foundation penetrations. 7. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. 8. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. 9. Valve stem movement. L. Draw plans to a scale not less than 1/4 inch equals one (1) foot. Include plans, sections, and elevations of proposed work, showing all equipment, piping and ductwork in areas involved. Fully dimension all work horizontally and vertically. Show coordination with other work including sprinklers, lighting fixtures, conduits, pullboxes, panelboards, and other electrical work, walls, doors, ceilings, columns, beams, joists and other architectural and structural work. M. Identify all equipment and devices on wiring diagrams and schematics. Where field connections are shown to be factory-wired terminals include manufacturer's literature showing internal wiring. N. Installation and coordination drawings shall be produced on an AutoCad format. Reproduction of any portion of the mechanical and electrical contract drawings for resubmittal as a shop drawing is strictly prohibited. Shop drawings produced in such a manner will be rejected and returned not reviewed. Installation and coordination drawings shall be to scale reflecting actual equipment sizes purchased for the project. O. The Base architectural and structural background drawings will be provided on Autocad format by the Construction Manager/General Contractor. These "Base" background documents are to be provided to each Contractor in the coordination process to establish a common platform for each Contractor to use for their design drawings. This same information will be used to communicate their respective coordination with the other Contractors. Coordination will be accomplished by each Contractor superimposing his work on drawings in the following sequence: 1. Construction Manager/General Contractor - Base Drawings indicating structural steel with elevations for bottom of beams & finish floor. The general contractor shall include a layout of ceiling tiles (where applicable). 2. HVAC Contractor - Ductwork layout drawings & piping with elevations to bottom of ductwork & piping. HVAC contractor shall indicate location of all registers, diffusers and grilles. 3. Plumbing Contractor - Layout of all piping with elevations. 4. Sprinkler Contractor - Layout of all piping & heads with elevations. 5. Electrical Contractor - Conduit layout with junction boxes and location of all electrical fixtures. P. If necessary, Contractor coordination meetings shall be held continuously until the coordination drawings are complete and approved by all parties. Any conflicts, etc., discovered in the coordination stages prior to Contractor(s) sign-off which cannot be resolved by the Contractor(s) shall be brought to the Architect's attention for resolution. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

284 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 Q. Any conflicts, etc., discovered after the created and submission of the coordination and installation drawings and during the installation of the Work will be the responsibility of the Contractor(s) to resolve with the approval of Architect. Any and all costs for these resolutions shall be solely the responsibility of the Contractor(s). R. Work fabricated/installed prior to the completion of the coordination and installation drawings is performed at the Contractors own risk, and compensation of time/costs for corrections will not be awarded. Any work installed that is not in conformance with final approved coordination and installation drawings shall be required to be removed and relocated, and compensation of time/costs for corrections will not be awarded. S. Each Contractor is responsible for timely updates to the coordination drawings to indicate as-built conditions for their own work. Updates are required to include all changes regardless of the source or reason for the change, including changes initiated by the Owner, Architects or Engineers. 2.3 PIPING, CONDUITS, AND SUPPORTS, GENERALLY A. Piping and conduits, except electrical conduits run in floor construction, shall be run parallel with the lines of the building, unless otherwise shown or noted on the drawings. Electrical conduits shall not be hung on hangers with any other service pipes. The different service pipes, valves, and fittings shall be so installed that after the covering is applied there will not be less than 1/2 inch clear space between the finished covering and other work and between the finished covering and parallel adjacent pipes. Hangers on different service lines, running parallel with each other and nearly together, shall be in line with each other and parallel to the lines of the building. Exact location of sprinklers, electrical outlets, piping, ducts, and conduits shall be coordinated among the trades so that there will be no interference between lighting fixtures, piping, ducts, and conduits. Where conflicts between the trades result, they shall be resolved by the Contractor to the Architect s satisfaction and at no expense to the Owner. B. Hangers shall be spaced to prevent sag and permit proper drainage. Refer to Division 23, Section Basic Materials and Methods for hanger spacing. A hanger shall be placed within one (1) foot of each horizontal elbow. See drawings for any additional hanger requirements. C. Vertical runs of pipe and conduit less than fifteen (15) feet long shall be supported by hangers placed one (1) foot or less from the elbows on the connecting horizontal runs. Vertical runs of pipe and conduit over fifteen (15) feet long, but not over sixty (60) feet long, and not over six (6) inches in size, shall be supported by heavy steel clamps. Clamps shall be bolted tightly around the pipes and conduits and shall rest securely on the building structure without blocking. Clamps may be welded to the pipes or placed below coupling. D. Hangers and support devices shall be by Anvil International, Unistrut, Fee & Mason, Elcene, Kindorf, Mueller or Auto-Grip. Unless otherwise specified, or indicated on the MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

285 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 drawings, pipe and conduit hangers and hanger supports shall conform to the following Anvil International figures. 1. Hangers generally shall be Figs. 65, 104, 212, 260 and Hanger Figs. 212 and 295 shall be provided with turnbuckles and eye rods or rods with eye nuts. 3. Turnbuckles shall be Figs. 114 or 230, shall have not less than 1-1/2 inches of adjustment, and shall be provided with locknuts. 4. Brackets Figs. 194, 195, and 199 shall be used for support of pipe hangers on lines larger than four (4) inches run along walls near floors. 5. Riser clamps shall be Figs. 261 or CT Roller hangers Figs. 171, 175, 177 and 181 shall be used for steam and condensate piping two (2) inches and larger and wherever the movement of pipe due to expansion exceeds 3/4 inch per foot of hanger rod lengths. 7. Roller supports shall be adjustable, Anvil International Fig. 274 for installation of hot service piping over two (2) inches in size and installed in racks or on trapeze hangers. 8. Concrete inserts shall be Figs. 281 or On copper pipes, hangers in contact with pipe shall be copper plated. E. In lieu of individual hangers, multiple (trapeze) hangers may be used for water pipes having same elevation and slope and for electrical conduits as specified hereinafter: 1. Horizontal members shall consist of 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch twelve (12) gauge, cold formed, lipped channels designed to accept special, springheld, hardened steel nuts for securing hanger rods and other attachments. Two (2) or more such channels may be welded together forming horizontal members of greater strength than single channels. Members shall be Kindorf, Unistrut, or equal. Horizontal members made of Kindorf, Unistrut, or similar products shall be limited to a maximum length of eight (8) feet. Structural steel members shall be used for horizontal members exceeding eight (8) feet in length. 2. Each multiple hanger shall be designed to support a load equal to the sum of the weights of the pipes, conduits, wire, and water, the weight of the hanger itself, and 200 pounds. The size of the hanger rods shall be such that the stress at the roof of the thread will not be over 10,000 pounds per square inch at the design load. No rod shall be smaller than 3/8 inch. The size of the horizontal members shall be such that the maximum stress will not be over 15,000 pounds per square inch at design load. 3. Horizontal runs of piping and conduits along walls, four (4) inches and smaller, exposed or concealed, shall be secured to Kindorf or Unistrut support members as specified hereinbefore. Provide appropriate clamps, brackets and similar attachments to secure piping and conduits to vertical members in accordance with applicable sections of the specification. 4. Refer to architectural and laboratory design drawings and specifications for additional requirements related to supports using Kindorf or Unistrut type systems. F. Hanger attachments shall be suitable for each type of hanger and shall be compatible with MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

286 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 the building materials to which it is secured. The types of attachments which shall be used for the various types of building construction encountered shall conform to the following Anvil International figures: 1. Concrete (new) - Inserts Figs. 281 or 282. Power driven fasteners may be used for light loading as hereinafter specified. 2. Concrete (existing) - Figs. 47, 49 or 52 attachments. Refer to drawings for specific application of individual types. 3. Steel beams - Figs. 66, 92, and 93 attachments. Refer to drawings for specific application of individual types. 4. Bar joists - Figs. 60 or Brick or block walls - Figs. 194, 195, 199, or 202 fastened as follows: For light duty, self-drilling anchors in brick and toggle bolts in block; for heavy duty, through bolts with backing plates. G. Per IBC code section 1912 and ACI 318 Appendix D, all concrete anchors within the scope of ACI 318 require approved anchors for crack concrete. Attachment devices shall have certified load test data from an independent test laboratory and shall be capable of carrying a minimum of five times the design load. The concrete anchors for the following supported items need to meet the crack concrete requirements: 1. Any suspended pipe, larger than 2", regardless of material. 2. All components with an Ip 1.5 (example) Sprinkler piping, gas lines, exhaust / fume hoods containing hazards. 3. Cable tray. 4. All components required to function after a seismic event (example) generator, emergency lightings, fire alarm and all associated conduits / panels, etc. 5. Anywhere required by ASCE All suspended HVAC and air distribution equipment, including air handling units, supply and exhaust air terminal units, fan coil units and fans. H. Welded attachments for securing hangers to piping or to structural steel may be provided in lieu of other attachments specified. Welded attachments shall be designed so that the fiber stress at any point in the weld or attachment will not exceed the fiber stress in the hanger rod. I. Refer to Division 23, Section Mechanical Vibration, Sound and Seismic Controls, for vibration hanger requirements. J. In no case shall wire or perforated strap be used for pipe or conduit support. K. All piping, ductwork, and equipment shall be suspended from the structure above unless otherwise indicated or noted on the drawings. The Contractor shall obtain prior approval from the Architect for floor supports of piping, ductwork, and equipment. Provide structural steel members consisting of angles, channels, and beams as required to hang piping, ductwork, and equipment. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

287 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 L. Gripple hangers shall be used to suspend all exposed rectangular, oval, round and spiral ductwork. Gripple hangers shall consist of a pre-formed wire rope sling with either a preformed ferruled loop, permanently fixed threaded stud, or permanently fixed end-stop with or without a toggle. This is secured and tensioned with a Gripple. 1. The contractor shall select the correct specification of Gripple hangers for supporting each particular service. 2. Gripple hangers shall be installed in accordance with all the manufacturer s recommendations. 2.4 SLEEVES AND PLATES A. All pipe sleeves shall be constructed of one (1) piece Schedule 40 steel pipe, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. B. Where watertight sleeves are indicated, provide Link Seal rubber seals, as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation, between pipes and sleeves. C. Escutcheon plates shall be provided for all exposed pipes passing through walls, floors, and ceilings in finished areas. Plates shall be chrome plated brass, split ring type, and sized to match the pipe or insulation where installed. Where plates are provided for pipes passing through sleeves which extend above the floor surface, provide deep recessed plates to conceal the pipe sleeves. D. Provide twenty-four (24) gauge galvanized sheet metal sleeves for all exposed ductwork passing through floors, walls, or ceilings and all ductwork passing through fire-rated or smoke partitions. Duct sleeves shall be large enough to pass duct with insulation and shall have 2 (two) inch flanges returned against floor, wall, partition, or ceiling. Where fire dampers are required, provide sleeves as detailed on the drawings and as required by the damper manufacturer. E. At all sleeves, where noise can be transmitted and at fire rated separations, seal all openings between pipes and ducts and corresponding sleeve to prevent sound transmission and maintain fire rating of the wall, floor or ceiling. Submit method of sealing sleeves for approval. U.L. assembly rating of fire walls and floors shall be maintained at all times. All sleeves installed in masonry or concrete construction shall be grouted in place. 2.5 FIRE RATED PENETRATION SYSTEMS A. Provide UL Listed fire penetration systems in openings in rated floors, walls, and other elements of construction. Provide UL listed fire penetration systems at all new and existing pipe penetrations of new and existing rated construction within the area of work. Coordinate work of this section with all other trades necessary for the proper installation of the fire rated penetration systems. B. Submit shop drawings showing each condition requiring penetration seals in dictating MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

288 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 proposed UL systems materials, anchorage, methods of installation, and actual adjacent construction. Submit a copy of UL illustration of each proposed system indicating manufacturer approved modifications. Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications, recommendations, inspection requirements, installation instructions, and maintenance data for each type of material required. Include letter indicating that each material complies with the requirements and is recommended for the applications shown. C. All fire penetration systems shall reference ASTM E814/UL Fire Test of Through - Penetration Fire Stops. D. All systems shall be UL tested and listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. E. Submit copies of written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace joint sealers which fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, general durability or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer's data as an inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated. The guarantee period shall be one (1) year from date of substantial completion. F. 3M products have been specified as the penetration fire stop basis of design. Other manufacturer's systems are acceptable providing they meet the requirements set forth in this specification. The fire rated penetration systems shall be the products of one manufacturer to the maximum extent possible. The products of more than one manufacturer shall not be used as a combined seal. G. Provide materials classified by UL to provide fire stopping equal to time rating, both "F" and "T" ratings, of construction being penetrated. Provide asbestos free materials that comply with applicable codes and have been tested under positive pressure in accordance with UL 1479 or ASTM E814. Systems shall be smoke and air tight. H. Deliver material undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers identified with brand, type, grade, and UL label where applicable. Coordinate delivery with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at site. Store material in clean, dry ventilated location. Protect from soiling, abuse, and moisture. Follow manufacturer's instruction. I. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. Proceed with installation only after penetrations of the substrate and supporting brackets have been installed. J. Furnish adequate ventilation if using solvent. Furnish forced air ventilation during installation if required by manufacturer. Keep flammable materials away from sparks or flame. Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces by fire stopping resistance. K. Clean surfaces to be in contact with penetration seal materials, of dirt, grease, oil, loose, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

289 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 materials, rust, or other substances that may affect proper fitting, adhesion of the required fire resistance. L. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL Fire Resistance Directory and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smoke barrier. Where floor openings without penetrating items are more than four (4) inches in width and subject to traffic or loading, install fire stopping materials capable of supporting same loading as floor. Protect materials from damages on surfaces subject to traffic. M. Clean up spills of liquid components. Neatly cut and trim materials as required. Remove equipment, materials, and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition. N. Examine penetration sealed areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities. Perform under this section patching and repairing of fire stopping caused by cutting or penetration by local inspectors and other trades. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP A. Each Subcontractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent who shall be constantly in charge of the installation of the work. B. The quality of workmanship required, for each trade, in the execution of work shall be the finest and highest obtainable in that trade working with the materials specified. Workmanship shall be satisfactory to the Architect and his decision as to acceptable quality is final. C. Workmanship proven to be of poor quality or unsatisfactory in the commissioning phase of the project as deemed by the Architect shall be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Architect. 3.2 EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE A. All equipment, devices, controls, and hardware shall be proven to operate successfully throughout the guarantee period. Systems shall be proven during all weather seasons and be demonstrated to affect the design conditions at times. System components or equipments items that fail to consistently deliver the design conditions shall be removed and replaced as directed by the Architect. The cost of required equipment replacements shall be borne by the Contractor. B. All equipment shall be tested after installation and be proven to deliver the manufacturers quoted design capacity. When capacity is in question as deemed by the Architect, the MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

290 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 Contractor shall perform a detailed and comprehensive field performance test to certify the equipment capacity. System effect or installed performance factors may not be applied to performance ratings unless they were previously included when the equipment was submitted for approval. Equipment that fails to deliver manufacturers quoted design capacity shall be removed and replaced at the Contractors expense. C. Workmanship proven to be of poor quality or unsatisfactory in the commissioning phase of the project as deemed by the Architect shall be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Architect. 3.3 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. All equipment shall be installed and connected in accordance with the best engineering practice and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Auxiliary piping, piping specialties, water seals, valves, and electric connections recommended by the manufacturer, required by code or required for proper operation shall be provided. 3.4 WATERPROOFING A. Under no circumstances shall waterproofing be damaged or penetrated. Should conditions arise which indicate such necessity, notify the Architect. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and patching associated with the work in the existing structure shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Existing surfaces, which are damaged by the Contractor, shall be repaired or provided with new materials. All patching shall be done with materials and methods similar to existing adjacent work, subject to approval of the Architect. Structural members shall not be cut or penetrated. Holes cut through concrete and/or masonry to accommodate new work shall be cut by reciprocating or rotary, nonpercussive methods. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval dimensioned drawings showing all penetrations through structural slabs or walls required for mechanical and electrical work. Drawings shall clearly show opening size, plan location, and/or elevation as applicable. All openings shall be approved by the Architect prior to starting work. C. Patching of areas disturbed by installation of new work shall match existing adjacent surfaces in material, texture, and color. 3.6 PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORK A. When working in and around the existing building, extreme care shall be exercised with regard to protection of the existing structure and mechanical and electrical services. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

291 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 Repair or replace, to the satisfaction of the Architect, any existing work damaged in the performance of the new work. 3.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS A. Base all measurements (both horizontal and vertical) from established bench marks. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at site and check correctness of same as related to the work. Verify locations of existing utilities and inverts of same prior to the start of any systems shown connecting to existing utilities. B. Should the Contractor discover any discrepancy between actual measurements or conditions, and those indicated, which prevent following good practice or the intent of the drawings and specifications, he shall notify the Architect and shall not proceed with his work until he has received instruction from the Architect. 3.8 HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIAL A. Proper and suitable tools, equipment and appliances for the safe and convenient handling and placing of all materials and equipment shall be used. During loading, unloading, and placing, care shall be taken in handling the equipment and materials so that no equipment or materials are damaged. B. All mechanical and/or electrical equipment delivered to the job site shall be stored on pedestals, above the ground and under roof or other approved covering. All enclosures for equipment shall be weatherproof. All motors, drives, switchgear, panels, etc. which are not totally enclosed, that are involved in the work, shall be stored in a heated, dry, water protected area with a minimum temperature of fifty degrees (50) Fahrenheit. All valves shall be stored under roof on wood pedestals, above ground. All insulation shall be stored under roof or in trailers, adequately protected from the weather. The Contractor shall follow all written instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer and all requirements of the Architect in oiling, protection and maintenance of equipment during storage. It shall be the Contractor's complete responsibility for the storage and care of the equipment and materials. C. If any equipment and/or materials are found to be in poor condition at the time of installation the Architect may, at his discretion, order the Contractor to furnish and install new equipment and/or material at no cost to the Owner. 3.9 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall give full cooperation to other trades and shall furnish in writing, with copies to Architect any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. Exact location of all mechanical and electrical equipment, devices, etc. in finished spaces shall be coordinated with Architectural reflected ceiling plans, elevations and details. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

292 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase CLEANING AND PAINTING A. Thoroughly clean all exposed surfaces of equipment and material and leave in a neat, clean condition ready for painting. Restore and touch-up factory finishes which have been damaged during construction. Finished painting will be performed under another Division. B. Miscellaneous requirements include: 3.11 ACCESSIBILITY 1. Touch-up threads of zinc coated screwed pipe with Rust-O-Leum primer and one (1) coat of enamel conforming with painting specification. 2. Paint behind grilles and registers in finished areas with two (2) coats of flat black paint following the proper surface preparation of the zinc coated metal. A. Locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated, or maintained, in fully accessible positions to eliminate the need for access panels and doors. Equipment shall include, but not be limited to, valves, clean-outs, motors, controllers, dampers, drain points, etc. B. Where overhead equipment cannot be located above spaces with either no ceilings or removable acoustical ceiling tiles, contractor shall provide, as part of the contract and no expense to the Owner, fourteen (14) gauge painted steel access doors where required and/or where directed (color shall match ceiling). Locations shall be coordinated with the Architect and indicated on the composite installation and coordination drawings. C. Access panels shall be Milcor or approved equal to suit material in which installed. Access doors installed in fire rated walls or shafts shall be labeled and shall match rating of the construction. Doors shall be of sufficient size to allow access to all components; minimum size shall be eighteen (18) inches by eighteen (18) inches. Doors in Toilet Rooms and Janitor s Closets shall be Type 304 stainless steel. D. Equipment deemed inaccessible by the Architect shall be reworked by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. All doors shall have cylinder locks operable from same key. Submit shop drawings for approval EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Refer to Division 23, Mechanical Vibration, Sound and Seismic Controls for vibration isolation and seismic restraint requirements. B. Supports will be furnished and installed under this Division and shall be in accordance with Division 3. C. The Subcontractors shall furnish, to the General Contractor, all required, bolts, washers, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

293 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 sleeves, plates and templates for equipment. D. Under this Section, provide all equipment supports; consisting of inertia pads, platforms, gratings, structural members and related materials required for the mechanical and electrical work. E. The type and size of the supporting channels and supplementary steel shall be determined by the Subcontractor and shall be of sufficient strength and size to allow only a minimum deflection in conformance with the manufacturer's requirements for loading SLEEVES AND PLATES A. Sleeves shall be provided by the trade installing the pipes or ducts for which sleeves are to be used. The sleeves shall be carefully located in advance of the construction of walls and floors, where new construction is involved. All cutting and patching necessary to set sleeves which are not placed prior to construction shall be the responsibility of the trade providing the sleeves. B. Sleeves shall be provided for all piping, conduits, and ducts passing through all floor slabs and concrete, masonry, tile, and gypsum wall construction. C. Fasten sleeves securely in floors and walls so that they will not become displaced when concrete is poured or when other construction is built around them. Take precautions to prevent concrete, plaster or other materials from being forced into space between pipe and sleeve during construction. D. Where pipe motion due to expansion and contraction will occur, make sleeves of sufficient diameter to permit free movement of pipe. Where insulated pipes and ducts pass through sleeves, the sleeves shall be large enough to pass the pipe or duct and the insulation. Check floor and wall construction to determine proper length for various locations; make actual lengths to suit the following: 1. Terminate sleeves flush with walls, partitions, and ceilings. 2. Terminate sleeves two (2) inches above finished floors. Fill all voids between sleeves and structures with an approved sealant or grout as determined by the Architect. Refer to Architectural drawings and specifications for sealing requirements of sleeves in floor. E. Submit, for approval, shop drawings showing size, type, and location of all sleeves and penetrations through poured concrete walls or existing structure. Sleeves installed in load bearing concrete or masonry construction shall be completely grouted in place. See Architectural drawings for extent and location of such walls. Single and multiple pipe or conduit penetrations, as well as duct openings, shall be accurately located by field measurements and indicated on the drawings. The drawings shall be prepared sufficiently in advance for approval by the Architect and shall be prepared at a minimum scale of 1/8 inch equals one (1) foot. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

294 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 F. Structural members shall not be cut or penetrated. Notify the Architect where penetrations of structural members are required. Holes cut through concrete and/or masonry, to accommodate new work, shall be cut by reciprocating or rotary, nonpercussive methods DEMOLITION A. All existing piping, conduit, equipment, ductwork, and materials not required for re-use or re-installation shall be removed. Any existing materials and equipment which are removed and are desired by the Owner, or are indicated to remain the property of the Owner, shall be delivered to him on the premises by the Contractor where directed by the Architect. All other materials and equipment which are removed shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed by him from the premises. B. Existing piping that remains concealed, buried, or otherwise contained in the remaining slabs and walls shall be capped, plugged, or otherwise sealed. All pipes shall be cut so that their capped or plugged ends will be below the finished floors or behind finished surfaces. C. Existing wiring, where possible, shall be removed or pulled through conduits. Wiring remaining shall be cut back behind the termination of conduits so that conduits can be adequately capped, plugged, or sealed CONNECTIONS AND ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING WORK A. When existing mechanical and electrical work is removed, all pipes, valves, ducts, and materials shall be removed to a point below the finished floors or behind finished walls and capped. Such points shall be far enough behind finished surfaces to allow for the installation of the normal thickness of finished material. B. When the work specified hereinafter connects to existing equipment, piping, or ductwork, the Contractor shall perform all necessary alterations, cuttings, or fitting of existing work as may be necessary or required to make satisfactory connections between the new and existing work and to leave the completed work in a finished and workmanlike condition, to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. When the work specified hereinafter or under other divisions of the contract necessitates relocation of existing equipment, piping, or ductwork, the Contractor shall perform all work and make all necessary changes to existing work as may be required to leave the completed work in a finished and workmanlike condition, to the satisfaction of the Architect. All work resulting in an extra to the contract shall be approved by the Owner and Architect before proceeding. D. All cutting and patching necessary for the installation of the mechanical work shall be done under this Division. Any damage done to the work already in place shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. Patching shall be uniform in appearance and shall MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

295 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 match the surrounding surface INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES A. Notify the Owner in writing at least seven (7) days in advance of any required shutdown of water, sewage, gas, electrical service or other utility. Upon written receipt of approval from Owner, shutdowns shall be performed between the hours of six (6) p.m. and six (6) a.m. including clean-up or as directed otherwise and shall be accomplished at no additional cost B. At the end of each interruption, all services shall be restored so that normal use of the building can continue. END OF SECTION MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

296 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SCOPE A. The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements and all other Specification Sections apply to the work specified in this section. In the event of conflict between specific requirements of the various documents, the more restrictive, the more extensive (i.e.: more expensive) requirement shall govern. A. This section includes requirements for items of equipment, materials and procedures which are common to more than one section of Division 21, 22 and 23 and which are general in nature and use. This section applies to all sections of Divisions 21, 22 and 23. B. The requirements of Division 23, Section Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions shall apply to all work specified under this section. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings for all items of materials specified in this section in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.4 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. The Contractor shall furnish labor, instruments, equipment, and materials required to perform tests prescribed in the sections describing the various systems. All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Owner and/or the Architect. Forty-eight (48) hours prior notice shall be given to the Owner and Architect for all tests. A written test report shall be submitted following all tests and before systems are insulated. B. Replace or repair defects found during inspection or tests with new materials. Caulking of welded joints, screwed joints, cracks, or holes is not acceptable. Correct leaks in screwed fittings by remaking joints. Cut out and reweld. Repeat tests after defects have been eliminated. C. Where reasonable doubt exists as to a system's ability to comply with contract requirements, perform any reasonable test required by the Architect. D. Make static pressure tests and prove to the satisfaction of the Architect the piping is tight before pipes are concealed. Tests shall be provided as hereinafter specified. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

297 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 E. Use test instruments tested for accuracy by an approved laboratory or by the instrument manufacturer, and furnish certificates showing degree of accuracy to the Architect when requested. Make calibration histories for each instrument available for examination. F. Where gauges, thermometers and other instruments which are to be left permanently installed are used for tests, do not install until just prior to the tests to avoid possible changes in calibration. 1.5 REFERENCES AND DEFINITIONS A. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, the term, and requirements of, domestic water systems shall universally apply to all potable, HVAC make-up and laboratory water systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HANGERS: A. See Division 23, Section Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions for general requirements. B. Hangers and accessories shall be Anvil International, Carpenter-Patterson, Michigan, B- Line, or Basic Engineering of the types specified in Division 23, Section Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions. C. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide an adequate pipe suspension system in accordance with recognized engineering practices, using standard, commercially accepted pipe hangers and suspension equipment. D. Contractor shall ensure that the pipe support system being provided is adequate for the service. For all pipe hangers, supports, anchors, guides, etc., the Contractor shall submit a pipe hanger assembly drawing in accordance with the recommendations provided by MSS SP-89. Provide proposed equipment manufacturer, manufacturer's model number and size, construction, finish, quantities and/or lengths. Utilize columns shown on Contract Drawings for the location plan. Indicate pipe system, line size, insulation thickness, and Contract Drawing for which the plan view of the pipe hanger location can be found. E. All brackets used for supporting piping shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be of welded steel construction with a design safety factor of not less than five. F. The design of all hangers and supports shall conform to the latest requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.1 or ANSI/B31.9 and Manufacturers' Standardization Society (MSS) Standard Practice SP-58, SP-69 and SP-89, unless otherwise made more stringent below. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

298 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Hangers for steel pipe, except as noted otherwise, shall be spaced at least every ten (10) feet. 2. Hangers for cast iron pipe shall be provided at each joint. 3. Hangers for copper pipe shall be placed at least every eight (8) feet, except pipes 3/4 inch and smaller shall have hangers at six (6) foot intervals. 4. Plastic and polypropylene piping systems 1 ¼ and smaller shall be provided with continuous pipe support using light gauge sheetmetal angles strapped to pipes. 5. Hangers shall be placed within one (1) foot of each horizontal and vertical elbow. G. Where concentrated loads of valves, fittings and similar items occur, closer hanger spacing will be necessary. H. Generally, hangers shall be clevis type, standard weight for lines 2-1/2 inch and larger. I. Vibration hangers shall be provided as hereinafter specified in Division 23, Section Mechanical Vibration, Sound and Seismic Controls. J. Pipe Shields 1. On insulated piping 2 and larger, provide Pipe Shields, Inc. Model No. A3000 and A5000 for use on warm systems and Model No. A4000 and A6000 for use on cold systems. Contractor shall select appropriate shield for support application. 2. On insulated piping smaller than 2, provide insulation protection shield equal to Anvil International Figure 167. Shield shall comply with Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) SP-58 (Type 40). K. Hangers in direct contact with copper piping systems shall be copper plated. L. All hangers shall be prime painted for interior locations and galvanized coated for exterior locations. M. Hangers shall be provided with seismic restraints as required by IBC 2012 and ASCE IDENTIFICATION, VALVE TAGS AND CHARTS A. A complete identification system shall be provided for all mechanical and electrical components which conform to the requirements published in ASME A13.1, NFPA 13 and the Fuel Gas Code. B. Product Data and Samples: In accordance with Division 1 Section Submittal Procedures, submit the following: C. Manufacturer s technical product data and installation instructions for each type of identification device specified. Include a list of all piping systems indicating a proposed nomenclature where a manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature does not match BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

299 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 up exactly with what is specified. D. Samples of each color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for: 1. Brass valve identification tag. 2. Pipe contents and identification markers. 3. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Reproduce on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown on tag, room or space location of valve, and variations for identification. Mark valves intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses. Besides mounted copies, furnish copies from maintenance manuals specified in Division Plastic equipment identification plates. 5. Paint colors for piping systems. 6. Stencils. E. All control devices, i.e.; panels, switches, starters, pushbutton stations, relays, temperature controls, etc., shall be clearly identified as to their function and the equipment controlled. All equipment such as pumps, fans, heaters, etc., shall be marked to clearly identify equipment and space or duty they serve. Mechanical equipment shall be identified using engraved laminated black and white phenolic legend plates. Letters shall be minimum 3/4 inch high white on surrounding black. Plates shall be mounted by means of sheet metal screws. Submit nameplate list for approval. F. Piping shall be identified with colored, prerolled, semirigid plastic labels as manufactured by Seton or approved equal. Labels shall be Seton "Set mark" system and shall be set around pipes with a field installed high strength cement compound applied along their longitudinal edge. Labels shall be placed around the piping or insulation every twenty (20) feet and with one (1) label on each pipe in rooms smaller than ten (10) feet. Provide labels on branch lines not more than 5 ft from main header. Provide labels on lines that penetrate walls or floors on each side of penetration not more than 5 ft from penetration. A label shall be placed at every major valve and at least six (6) feet from exit or entrance to an item of equipment. On exterior piping, utilize stencils to paint contrasting letters identifying pipe contents and direction of flow. Letter size and color shall comply with the requirements of adhesive pipe labels. G. For fan coils units located above the ceiling, in addition to a label on the device, labels are to be permanently affixed to the ceiling grid framing as near to the item as possible using epoxy glue. Where hard ceilings are used, the label is to be affixed to the frame of the access panel for the unit. Labels are to be black core white or beige Bakelite. The lettering is to be 3/8" inches high. The minimum label size is 3/4" wide by 1" long. Terminal units shall be identified as indicated on the mechanical drawings and ATC graphics. The thermostat that controls each air terminal unit shall be identified with an identical but appropriately sized label. H. Labels shall have minimum 3/4 inch high black letters for pipes one (1) inch and larger, and 1/2 inch letters for smaller pipes. All labels shall have flow arrows. Color coding BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

300 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 and stencil designations shall be as follows: Service Color Stencil Designation Potable Cold Water Green Potable Cold Water Potable Hot Water Green Potable Hot Water Sanitary Brown Sanitary Sewer Condensate Drain, Drain Brown Drain Water Heating Water Supply Yellow Heating Water Supply Heating Water Return Yellow Heating Water Return Chilled Water Supply Blue Chilled Water Supply Chilled Water Return Blue Chilled Water Return I. All valves, except as specified below, shall be provided with colored plastic valve tags with stamped-in numbers. Tags shall be secured to valve wheels with a metal chain. Stop valves on individual fixtures or equipment where their function is obvious, or where the fixture of equipment is immediately adjacent, need not be so equipped. Care shall be exercised in scheduling and selecting valve numbers to be indicated on a drawing. Drawing shall show locations, details of arrangements, identity, and function of all service and control valves. One (1) copy of each drawing and schedule shall be mounted and framed under plastic protection where directed. Blueprints are not acceptable. A copy of each drawing and schedule shall also be included as a part of the operations and maintenance manuals. Valve tags shall be Seton or approved equal minimum 1-1/2 inch round tags with white characters describing system and valve designation. J. Identify fire protection systems (sprinkler and fire alarm) as hereinafter specified as required by NFPA Standards 2.3 PIPE, FITTINGS AND JOINTS A. General: Items are referred to by type and shall conform to the latest editions of standards listed below: B. Provide pipe and fittings for fire protection as hereinafter specified in Division 21, Sections Fire Protection. C. All piping shall be new domestic pipe material, manufactured in the United States of America (USA) and be suitable for the specific use indicated on drawings and in the specifications. D. Piping Material: Service Piping Fittings Joints 1. Sanitary drainage: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

301 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 a. Underground: A I a b. Above ground within building J VIII i c. Vent piping J VIII i 2. Domestic cold water: F III e 3. Domestic hot water: F III e 1. Heating water supply and return: a. 2-1/2" and larger C VII b b. 2" and smaller C IV c c. 2" and smaller (optional) F III e 2. Heating water supply and return: a. 2-1/2" and larger C VII b b. 2" and smaller C IV c c. 2" and smaller (optional) F III e 3. Condensate Drain/Drain: a. Optional J VIII i b. Optional B II e E. Piping Assembly: Type 1. Cast iron hub and spigot pipe, service weight ASTM A74. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and listed by NSF International. 2. Copper drainage tubing, drain, waste, and vent, DWV, ASTM B Black steel pipe, ASTM A53/106 Grade B Seamless ANSI Schedule 40 Designation A B C BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

302 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 4. Seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88, Type L, hard F 5. Cast iron soil pipe, service weight No-Hub, ASTM A-888. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and listed by NSF International. J F. Fitting Materials: Type Designation 1. Cast iron soil pipe fittings, service weight, ASTM A74 I 2. Wrought copper and bronze drainage fittings, ANSI A16.29 II 3. Wrought copper solder joint fittings, 150 pound ANSI B16.22 III 4. Black malleable iron screwed fittings, 150 pound, ANSI B16.3 for less than seventy-five (75) pounds per square inch and 300 pounds for seventy-five (75) pounds per square inch or more 5. Steel butt-welding fittings ANSI B16.9 using long-turn ells, ANSI B16.5 weld neck or slip on flanges & Bonney Forge Weldolets and Threadolets. Wall thickness to match pipe. IV VII 6. Cast iron soil pipe fittings, No Hub, ASTM A-888 VIII G. Joint Materials: Type Designation 1. Premolded rubber gaskets Tyler Pipe Industries, TY-Seal or Multiple Seal, ASTM C Welded: Mechanical Contractors Association of America, Inc. Guidelines for Quality Piping Installation (1995), Section 2.1.O a b 3. Threaded: American Standard for Pipe Threads, ANSI B2.1 c 4. Soldered: ASTM B32 tin-antimony 95-5 e 5. No-Hub neoprene gasket and stainless steel corrugated shield, Tyler No-Hub coupling i BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

303 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase VALVES A. General: 1. Valves shall be provided where indicated on the drawings and as herein specified. 2. Valves shall be placed in such manner as to be easily accessible for hand wheel operation and stuffing maintenance. 3. Install shut-off valves in piping where shown or where listed below: a. To isolate all items of equipment. b. To isolate motorized flow control valves. c. To isolate branch lines and riser at mains. 4. Valve pipe connections shall be screw, solder or weld flange as required to be consistent with other parts of the piping system. 5. Where piping or equipment may subsequently need to be removed, provide valves with bodies having integral flanges or full lugs drilled and tapped to hold valve in place so that downstream piping or equipment can be disconnected and replaced with blank-off plate while valve is still in service. 6. Valves over ten (10) feet above standing level and above six (6) inches in size shall have chain wheel with chain extending to within six (6) feet of standing level. All wheel operated valves shall have an indicator to show the position of the disc or plug. 7. Where valves specified are not available in the pipe size noted on the drawing, the next larger size valve shall be provided. 8. Valves shall be provided for fire protection systems as specified in Division 21, Section Fire Protection. B. Balancing Valves: 1. Provide balancing valves where indicated and required to balance water flow through the piping system. 2. Balancing valves, 1 1/4 inches and larger, for systems piping shall be DeZurik as follows: PEC, flanged above two (2) inches with Buna filled PTFE U-ring seal and isobutene-isoprene plug facing, suitable for 250 degrees Fahrenheit continuous operation. Valves in chilled water systems may have seal and plug facing suitable for 180 degrees Fahrenheit. Valves six (6) inches and smaller shall have lever actuators and valves eight (8) inches and larger shall have gear operators. All actuators shall have adjustable memory stops. 3. Balancing valves one (1) inch and smaller shall be Armstrong Model CBV or as manufactured by TA Hydronics or approved equal. C. Butterfly Valves: 1. Butterfly valves may be used in lieu of gate valves in chilled water and heating water systems size 2-1/2 inches and over. 2. Butterfly valves shall be Nibco, Centerline, DeZurik, Posi-Seal, or Jamesbury BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

304 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 equal to Nibco Fig. No lug body type, installed with welding neck companion flanges. 3. Valves shall have semi-steel or ductile iron lug body for flanged connection with alignment bolts, holes or guides, Type 416 stainless steel one (1) piece stem, upper and lower brass bushings, EPDM or nitrile (Buna-N) rubber liner, and aluminum bronze disc. Provide minimum two (2) inch extension neck on valves for insulated piping. 4. Pressure ratings shall be 150 pounds per square inch (psi) body; dead end bubble tight shut off for 200 pounds per square inch (psi) differential in either direction. 5. Actuators for valves six (6) inches and smaller shall be lever type with locking trigger with ten (10) position notched quadrant. Actuators on valves eight (8) inches and larger shall be heavy duty gear operators. All actuators shall have adjustable memory stops. 6. Butterfly valves shall not be used for steam, feedwater or condensate service. D. Ball Valves: 1. Ball valves shall be used in all water systems size two (2) inches and smaller. 2. Ball valves shall be Nibco, Jamesbury, Apollo or Watts. 3. Three (3) piece ball valves sizes 1/2 inch to two (2) inch shall be used for all water piping systems to accommodate replacement of internal parts. Valves shall be equal to Nibco Figure No. 595-Y-66, swing out design, bronze body, full port, stainless steel ball, and stainless steel stem (ASTM A-276 Type 316), reinforced TFE seats. Body bolts and nuts shall be zinc dichromate plated steel and valve shall be suitable for 150 pounds per square inch saturated steam service. Valves shall be threaded or soldered to suit piping systems which they are installed. 4. Three (3) piece ball valves size 1/2 inch to two (2) inch shall be used for all steam and condensate piping systems to accommodate replacement of internal parts. Valves shall be equal to Nibco Figure No. 590-CS-R-66, stainless steel trim (A- 276 type 316) with threaded or socket weld ends to suit system wherein installed. 5. Valves shall be equipped with lever handle with extended stem for insulation thickness which shall indicate position of ball orifice and have stops for fully open and closed position. Construction shall be such that power actuator can be used. Ball opening shall be full pipe size. 6. Valve shall be suitable for flow in either direction and must be leak proof at all pressures up to 150 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) and temperatures from minus twenty (-20) degrees Fahrenheit to 350 degrees Fahrenheit in open or shut position. E. Drain Valves: 1. Drain valves shall be ball type as hereinbefore specified with hose end adapter and shall be provided at low points of all piping systems, and where indicated, 3/4 inch minimum. F. Valve Schedule: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

305 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Unless otherwise specified, valves shall be Nibco, Stockham, or Crane equal to the Nibco figure numbers indicated below: 2.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES a. Domestic Hot, Cold, Tempered and Recirculated Water Systems: Globe - Solder end S-211-Y Check - Solder end S-413-Y Gate - Flanged end F-619 b. Heating Water: Gate - 2-1/2" and over F-619 Globe 2-1/2" and over F-718-B Globe - 2" and under T-211-B Globe - Solder end S-211-Y Check - 2-1/2" and over F-918-B Check - 2" and under T-413-B Check - Solder end S-413-B A. Manual air vents shall be key-operated type installed as shown on drawings or as required for proper venting of equipment. Vents at top of vent chambers and coils shall be 1/4 inch ball valves. B. Pressure regulating valves on water fill lines serving hydronic systems shall be designed for 125 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) working pressure and set as required and shall be Watts Series U5B. Relief valves shall be Watts Series 174A, ASTM stamped for HVAC water systems. C. Strainers shall be Mueller Steam Specialty Company, Inc., or approved equal, No. 351 for two (2) inch and smaller, No. 758 (125 lbs.) or No. 725 (250 lbs.) for 2-1/2 inch and larger. Basket strainers shall be Mueller Steam Specialty Company, Inc. or approved equal, No Provide valved blow-down connections on each strainer consisting of a ball valve set between two (2) short nipples. Blow-down valve shall be full size of strainer blow-down connection. Steam and condensate strainers shall be laid parallel to the floor to prevent the accumulation of condensate in the strainer body. Screens shall be stainless steel with perforations as follows: Water Service up to 2 inches Water Service 2.5 inches to 4 inches Water Service 5 inches and larger 1/32 inch perforations 1/16 inch perforations 1/8 inch perforations 1. Contractor shall provide coarse construction strainers in each strainer or inline cone strainers in the piping system during equipment start-up periods. A list of construction strainers with their proposed location shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. After systems have been flushed clean and are fully operational construction strainers shall be removed and turned over to the Owner BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

306 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 for accounting. Final strainer elements shall be installed after all construction strainers have been accounted for. D. Coil flowmeter fittings shall be Taco Sentinel or approved equal, brass construction suitable for 150 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) working pressure and 250 degrees Fahrenheit operating temperature and shall be equipped with brass quick-disconnect valves for connecting flowmeter. The fitting shall have a maximum head loss of one (1) foot water at design flow rate and shall have an accuracy of plus or minus five percent for water temperatures from fifty (50) degrees Fahrenheit to 215 degrees Fahrenheit. Provide one (1) Taco differential pressure gauge Part No or approved equal, compatible with the flow meter fittings supplied. E. Install wells in heating water piping for automatic temperature control sensors. Exact locations and number of wells required shall be determined through coordination with the work required under Division 23, Section "Building Automation and Temperature Control System". F. All gauge ports, nipples and fittings shall be brass. Steel is not acceptable. 2.6 TEST PLUGS A. Pressure and temperature test plugs where indicated or required shall be 1/4 inch npt fittings, suitable to receive either a 1/8 inch outside diameter (OD) temperature or pressure probe. Fittings shall be solid brass with Nordel valve core, fitted with a color coded marked cap with gasket. The entire assembly shall be rated at 1000 pounds per square inch gauge (psig). Plugs shall be manufactured by Peterson Equipment Company, Inc., Richardson, Texas, or Sisco P/T plugs. 2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General: Provide assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joining of dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. B. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, soldered, plain end, or weld neck types matching piping system materials. C. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. D. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250 psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg. F. E. Dielectric Flange Insulating Kits: Field assembled, companion flange assembly, full face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. Provide Class 150 or Class 300 flanges to match system pipe requirements. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

307 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized steel coupling with inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic lining, threaded with 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg. F. G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic lining, threaded with 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg. F. 2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. General: Provide stainless steel braided flexible connectors with design pressure and temperature rating meeting or exceeding the test pressures and operating temperatures of the systems in which they are installed. Pipe sizes 2-inch and smaller shall be socket welded or threaded matching system requirements. Pipe sizes above 2-inch shall be Class 150 or Class 300 flanged matching system requirements. B. Stainless steel hose / Steel pipe, flexible connectors: Corrugated, stainless steel inner tubing covered with stainless steel single wire braid. Include steel nipples or steel flanges welded to hose. Minimum length shall be three times pipe diameter up to 4-inch pipe size and two times pipe diameter up to 18-inch pipe size. 2.9 EXPANSION A. All piping shall be so installed that it will in no way be distorted or strained by expansion or contraction. Except as noted, all expansion and contraction shall be taken up by means of swing joints, loops, bends or long offsets. Swing joints made up with at least three (3) elbows shall be provided in branches from mains in runouts. Size loops for the total pipe expansion without cold springing, but field cold spring 1/2 the pipe on expansion corrected for ambient temperature. B. Where expansion joints are indicated or required, select joints with a traverse of 150 percent of the pipe expansion from an ambient of forty (40) degrees Fahrenheit to the maximum system operating temperature. C. Expansion joints two (2) inches and larger shall have flanged ends, except when installed in copper piping systems. D. All expansion joints shall be suitable for minimum operating pressure and temperature of 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and 300 degrees Fahrenheit respectively. E. Expansion joints shall be of the following types: 1. Corrugated Type - Flexonics "Low-Corr" joints for pipes three (3) inches and larger. Flexonics Model H or HB for pipes smaller than three (3) inches. 2. Slip Type - Flexonics "Slip Pakt" with anchor base. F. Submit, for approval, manufacturers shop drawings of each expansion joint provided BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

308 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 depicting length of pipe, location of anchors and guides, calculated expansion offset and type of joint employed MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS FOR SUPPORTS AND HANGERS A. The Contractor shall provide all miscellaneous materials required to properly install all supports, hangers, anchors and guides, including: PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A Cement Grout: Portland Cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. 3. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. 3.1 CLEANING, FLUSHING, INSPECTING A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any.) Clean interior of pipe by mechanical means to remove welding slag, metal filings, dirt, and debris. Flush out piping systems to the satisfaction of the Owner before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports, and accessory items. 1. Inspect Power Piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31.1. B. The Contractor shall submit a detailed pipe flushing plan detailing the efforts to be taken to ensure a completely clean piping system. Any damage to existing or new equipment or components shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor s expense to the satisfaction of the Owner. C. The Contractor shall clean and flush all installed piping systems with a clean water solution with additives formulated to assist in the removal of welding slag, metal filings, oil, and grease. Flushing operations shall maintain a minimum velocity of six feet per second for a minimum four hour time frame. Repeat flushing operations to the satisfaction of the Owner and until flushing water is completely clear. System pumps may be utilized for flushing operations with fine mesh start-up screens. Clean screens often and replace with final system screens at completion of flushing operations. Provide temporary equipment bypasses for all components where metal slag and filings are prone to collect. The Contractor shall provide all temporary equipment and piping necessary to complete the flushing operations. D. Refill and vent water systems being sure to add water after venting to completely fill system. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

309 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 E. Provide water treatment services as indicated in other Division 23 specification Sections. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping without undue stress or strain in locations shown and run parallel to the lines of the building, except to grade them as specified in neat and workmanlike manner using a minimum of fittings. Provide such fittings, valves and accessories as may be required to meet the conditions of installation. Contractor shall inform himself fully regarding any peculiarities and limitations of space available for installation of material under each section of specifications. Install piping to suit necessities of clearance with ducts, conduits, and other work, and so as not to interfere with any passages or doorways and allow sufficient head room at all places. Use proper reducing fittings for changing piping sizes. B. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established in the field in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage or without forcing or springing. Perform cutting by means of an approved type of mechanical cutter of the wheel type where practicable. Ream pipe after cutting to remove all burrs. C. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. Carefully investigate the architectural and structural conditions affecting the work, and arrange such work accordingly, providing such fittings, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions. Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location arrangement and restrictions of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout shall take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated on the Contract Drawings unless deviations to layout are approved on the Coordination Drawings. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic in nature and are not welding fit-up documents. The Contractor is responsible for a complete installation. Refer to individual system specifications for requirements for coordination drawing submittals. D. Install unions and flanges where shown and on each side of all pieces of equipment and other similar items, and in such a manner that the unions can be readily disconnected. Do not place any union or flange in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of the project unless so shown on drawings or specified. 1. Unions in steel pipe 2 1/2 inches and smaller, shall be 250 pound malleable iron, brass seat type. Use 150 pound forged steel flanges for piping three (3) inches and larger. Gaskets shall be 1/8 inch thick. 2. Unions in copper pipe two (2) inches and smaller shall be wrought copper with red bronze ring nut. Use 150 pound ASME copper flanges for piping 2 1/2 inches and larger. Use dielectric unions or couplings where nonferrous metal is joined to ferrous metal. E. Use reducing fittings, eccentric where required to prevent pocketing of air and water or BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

310 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 both, to make changes to pipe sizes. F. HVAC piping shall be installed plumb, level, and square with low point drains and high point vents. Steam, condensate, drain and sanitary waste and vent piping shall be sloped per code. G. Contractor shall fully coordinate the installation of all piping systems with all other trades including sheet metal, electrical, sprinkler, ceiling systems, etc. 3.3 JOINTS A. Steel Pipe Joints: 1. Threaded Pipe Joints, 2 and Smaller: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads in accordance with ANSI B Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint lubricant or sealant suitable for the service for which the pipe is intended on the male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. Align threads at point of assembly. Tighten joint with wrench. Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are damaged or corroded. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. Comply with the provided pipe material classification requirements for allowance of threaded pipe within each service type. Threaded pipe will not be allowed for high temperature hot water service. 2. Pipe Larger Than 2 : a. Weld Pipe joints in accordance with ASME Code for Building Services Piping, Bevel weld end to end. Sleeve welds shall not be permitted. b. Install flanges on all valves, apparatus, and equipment. Weld pipe flanges to pipe ends in accordance with ASME Code for Building Services Piping. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using a torque wrench to torque specified by manufacturer or flange and sequence flange bolts, to provide uniform compression of gaskets. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. B. Non-Ferrous Pipe Joints: 1. Brazed and Soldered Joints: For copper tube and fitting joints, braze joints in accordance with ANSI B Standard Code for Pressure Piping, Power Piping and ANSI B9.1 Standard Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 2. Thoroughly clean tube surface and inside surface of the cup of the fittings, using very fine emory cloth, prior to making soldered or brazed joints. Wipe tube and fittings clean and apply flux. Flux shall not be used as the sole means for cleaning tube and fitting surfaces. C. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

311 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets. D. Hubless Cast-Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer s installation instructions. 3.4 WORKMANSHIP A. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at structure. Install pipes without springing or forcing. B. Clear windows, doors, and other openings with all pipes and ductwork. C. Arrange pipes to permit expansion and contractions without misalignment or damage. D. During construction all openings in piping and equipment shall be closed with caps or plugs to keep out all foreign matter and to prevent leakage. E. All piping in finished spaces shall be run concealed unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 SLEEVES AND PLATES A. Sleeves shall be provided by the trade installing the pipes for which sleeves are to be used. The sleeves shall be carefully located in advance of the construction of walls and floors where new construction is involved. All cutting and patching necessary to set sleeves which are not placed prior to construction shall be the responsibility of the trade providing the sleeves. B. Sleeves shall be provided for all piping passing through all floor slabs and concrete, plaster, gypsum, or masonry wall construction. C. Where pipe motion due to expansion and contraction will occur, make sleeves of sufficient diameter to permit free movement of pipe. Where sleeves pass insulated pipes, the sleeves shall be large enough to pass the pipe and the insulation. Check floor and wall construction to determine proper length for various locations; make actual lengths to suit the following: 1. Terminate sleeves flush with wall. 2. Terminate sleeves two (2) inches above finished floors. D. Submit for approval shop drawings showing size, type, and location of all sleeves and penetrations through poured concrete walls. See Architectural Drawings for extent and location of such walls. E. All pipe sleeves shall be constructed of Schedule 40 steel pipe unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

312 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase TESTS F. See drawings for additional sleeve requirements. G. Fasten sleeves securely in floors and walls so that they will not become displaced when concrete is poured or when other construction is built around them. Take precautions to prevent concrete, plaster or other materials from being forced into space between pipe and sleeve during construction. Caulk the annular space with elastic caulk compound or as noted to make tight. H. Where watertight sleeves are indicated, provide Link Seal rubber seals, as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation, between pipes and sleeves, or provide sleeves as detailed. A. The following tests shall be conducted by the Contractor and all piping shall be proven tight in the presence of the Architect or his representative. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is installed and any insulation installed prior to tests shall be removed. Provide all equipment and labor required. Tests shall be at least four (4) hours in duration, after all piping has been proven tight. Piping may be tested in sections as approved by the Architect. Tests shall be as specified herein and a written test report shall be submitted to the Architect within two (2) days following each individual test. All test reports shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals. B. The domestic water piping shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 pounds per square inch gauge (psig). All openings in the water piping shall be plugged; the system, or portion thereof, filled with water, and tested with a pump to a pressure of 150 pounds per square inch gauge (psig). Domestic water system piping shall be disinfected after tests in accordance with Baltimore City and Maryland State Health Department Requirements. C. The sanitary and miscellaneous drain systems shall be hydrostatically tested. Tests shall be as required by code and as a minimum shall comprise of the plugging of all openings in the lines, filling the system (or portion thereof), with water until all joints are proven tight. Piping shall be tested with a minimum head of ten (10) feet of water. D. All heating water piping shall be hydrostatically tested to 1-1/2 times the system working pressure or a minimum of 100 pounds per square inch gauge (psig), whichever is greater. E. Fire protection system shall be tested in accordance with applicable NFPA Standards. Refer to Division 15, Section Fire Protection. F. All heating water piping systems shall be filled with water and thoroughly flushed clean of foreign matter after erection and before connection of equipment. G. After heating water systems have received their final filling, employ a qualified water testing laboratory to analyze the water and to provide proper treatment to bring the ph to a level between 6.5 and Furnish three (3) certified copies of the test report to BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

313 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase STERILIZATION Architect. Include the test report data, water analysis, any treatment provided for initial treatment, and recommended type of continuous treatment to be provided for the makeup water to the systems. A. Domestic water system piping shall be disinfected in accordance with State of South Carolina Health Department requirements and Section 610 of the 2012International Plumbing Code. A written test report shall be submitted to the Owner and Architect within five (5) days following the sterilization process and before occupancy is granted. All written reports shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals. B. After final testing for leaks, all new domestic water lines shall be thoroughly flushed by Contractor to remove foreign material. Before placing the systems in service, Contractor shall engage a qualified water service Contractor to sterilize the new water lines. Sterilization shall include as a minimum the following procedure: 1. Through a ¾ hose connection in the main entering the building, pump in sufficient sodium hypochlorite to produce a free available chlorine residual of not less than 200 parts per million. The Contractor shall provide plumbing connections and power for pumping chlorine into the system. 2. Proceed upstream from the point of chlorine application opening all faucets and taps until chlorine is detected. Close faucets and taps when chlorine is evident. 3. When chlorinated water has been brought to every faucet and tap with a minimum concentration of 200 parts per million chlorine, retain this water in the system for three (3) hours. CAUTION: Over-concentration of chlorine and more than three (3) hours of retention may result in damage to piping system which shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost. 4. At the end of the retention period, no less than 100 parts per million of chlorine shall be present at the extreme end of the system. 5. Proceed to open all faucets and taps and thoroughly flush all new lines until the chlorine residual in the water is less than 1.0 parts per million. 6. Obtain representative water samples, at least two (2), from the system for analysis by a recognized bacteriological laboratory. 7. If the samples tested for coliform organisms is negative, a letter and laboratory report shall be submitted by the water service organization to the Contractor, certifying successful completion of the sterilization. 8. If any samples tested indicate the presence of coliform organism, the entire sterilization procedure shall be repeated. 3.8 MOLD AND CONDENSATION PREVENTION A. Piping Systems: Cold piping systems (such as cold water) shall not be operated prior to insulation and vapor barrier installation in order to prevent condensation on the piping. B. Air Systems: Air handling systems shall not be operated at supply air temperatures BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

314 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 below fifty (50) degrees F and all supply air ductwork shall be insulated prior to operation. Coils shall be insulated to prevent condensation when heating valve is closed. Air systems shall not be operated in portions of the building not yet fully enclosed, where systems can be exposed to warm, humid air conditions. C. Room thermostats shall not be set lower than sixty-eight (68) degrees F. Programmable thermostats shall be set to prevent lower temperature setting from the exterior of the thermostat by room occupants. D. Contractor shall notify the Architect immediately if signs of condensation or mold are discovered. END OF SECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

315 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SCOPE A. The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements and all other Specification Sections apply to the work specified in this section. In the event of conflict between specific requirements of the various documents, the more restrictive, the more extensive (i.e.: more expensive) requirement shall govern. B. The 2012 International Building Code and SEI/ASCE 7-05 Standard apply to all work associated with the seismic installation of all new mechanical and electrical equipment. Refer to Architectural and Structural drawings for seismic loads and additional seismic information. A. This section includes requirements for items of equipment, materials and procedures which are common to more than one section of Division 22 and 23. This section applies to all sections of Divisions 22 and SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Elastomeric hangers. 2. Spring hangers. 3. Resilient pipe guides. 4. Restraining cables. 5. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision. 6. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads. B. Work includes vibration control devices, materials, and related items for mechanical and electrical systems. Perform all work as shown on the drawings and as specified herein to provide complete vibration isolation systems in proper working order. C. The requirements of Division 23, Section Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions shall apply to work specified under this section. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. A v : Effective peak velocity related acceleration coefficient. MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

316 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning & Development for the State of California. OSHPD assigns a unique anchorage preapproval "R" number to each seismic restraint it tests. The number describes a specific device applied as tested. C. Life Safety Systems: 1. All systems involved with fire protection. 2. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply including all generators, transfer switches, transformers and all flowpaths to fire protection and/or emergency lighting systems. 3. All life support systems. 4. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including air handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc. 5. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment schedule. D. Positive Attachment: A positive attachment is defined as a cast-in anchor, a drill-in wedge anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded or bolted connection to structure. Single sided "C" type beam clamps for support rods of overhead piping, ductwork, fire protection, electrical conduit, bus duct, or cable trays, or any other equipment are not acceptable on this project as seismic anchor points. E. Transverse Bracing: Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit. F. Longitudinal Bracing: Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit. G. Failure: For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance of any attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical permanent deformation greater than 1/8" and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater that 1/4". 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by the manufacturer s qualified professional engineer. Before ordering any products, submit shop drawings of the items listed below. The shop drawings must be complete when submitted, be based on equipment actually purchased and must be presented in a clear, easily understood form. Incomplete or unclear presentation of shop drawings may be reason for rejection of the submittal. Include the following: 1. Product Description: A complete description of products to be supplied, including product data, dimensions, specifications, and installation instructions. 2. Selection Data: Detailed selection data for each vibration isolator supporting MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

317 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 equipment, including: a. Equipment identification mark; b. Isolator type; c. Actual load; d. Static deflection expected under the actual load e. Specified minimum static deflection. 3. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by the manufacturer's registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the job location. 4. Seismic-Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of seismic restraints and snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors. 5. Submittals for Interlocking Snubbers: Include load deflection curves up to 1/2- inch deflection in x, y, and z planes. 6. Seismic restraint calculations. 7. Provide Approved Agencies Certificate of Compliance meeting Seismic Category D for all components. Tests shall include anchorage, structural and on line capability from analytical or shaker test method. C. Submission of samples may be requested for each type of vibration isolation device. After approval, samples will be returned for installation at the job if requested. All costs associated with submission of samples shall be borne by the Contractor. D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that all specified equipment will withstand seismic forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Article above. Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculations. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. 1.6 MANUFACTURER RESPONSIBILITIES A. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraint equipment shall have the MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

318 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 following responsibilities: 1. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. 2. Provide piping and equipment isolation systems and seismic restraints as scheduled or specified. 3. Guarantee specified isolation system deflection. 4. Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to assure proper installation and performance. 5. Provide certification by a licensed engineer employed by the manufacturer that all mounts and restraints meet the project requirements for seismic loading. B. Substitution of internally isolated mechanical equipment in lieu of the specified isolation of this Section must be approved for individual equipment units and is acceptable only if above acceleration loads are certified in writing by the equipment manufacturer and stamped and sealed by a licensed civil or structural engineer. 1.7 RELATED WORK A. Supplementary Steel 1. Provide any incidental materials and supplementary support steel for all equipment, piping, ductwork, roof mounted equipment, etc., such as mounting brackets, attachments and other accessories, that may be needed to meet the requirements stated herein, even if not expressly specified or shown on the drawings, at no additional cost. B. Attachments 1. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the vibration vendor's calculations. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis performed according to OSHPD and shall bear anchorage preapproval "R" number, from OSHPD or another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads and 1 test or analysis at 45 degrees to the weakest mode. B. Seismic restraints for mechanical systems shall comply with 2009 IBC and ASCE MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

319 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 C. Verify correctness of equipment model numbers and conformance of each component with manufacturer's specifications. D. Should any rotating or electrical equipment cause excessive noise or vibration when properly installed on the specified isolators, the Contractor shall be responsible for rebalancing, realignment, or other reme dial work required to reduce noise and vibration levels. Excessive is defined as exceeding the manufacturer's specifications for the unit in question. E. Upon completion of the work, the Architect shall inspect the installation and shall inform the installing contractor of any further work that must be completed. Make all adjustments as directed by the Architect that result from the final inspection. This work shall be done before vibration isolation systems are accepted. F. The contractor shall provide a quality assurance plan prepared by a registered design professional for all mechanical, plumbing and electrical equipment and systems. The plan shall include the provisions of the 2009 International Building Code, per section and The plan shall be submitted to the Architect for review and approval. The contractor shall coordinate the requirements of the plan with the Owner and shall cooperate with the Owner s Seismic Quality Assurance coordinator. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ace Mounting Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. B-Line Systems, Inc. 4. California Dynamics Corp. 5. Isolation Technology, Inc. MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

320 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 6. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 7. Mason Industries, Inc. 8. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 9. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc. 10. Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund. B. General: 1. Select vibration isolating units for the lowest operating speed of equipment, so designed that natural frequency of equipment and base mass is not less than 1.5 times the lowest operating frequency of the moving equipment, but not a multiple or harmonic of the base frequency. Furnish vibration isolation producing a uniform loading and deflection even when equipment weight is not evenly distributed, vibration isolation shall be stable during starting and stopping of equipment without excessive traverse and eccentric movement of equipment. 2. The installed vibration isolation system for each ceiling mounted item of equipment shall have a maximum lateral motion under equipment start up and shut down conditions of 1/4 inch. Motions in excess shall be restrained by approved spring type mounting. 3. All electrical connections, drain connections, etc., made to equipment which rests on vibration isolators, shall be sufficiently flexible to permit the equipment to be properly isolated. 4. The type of isolation, base, and minimum static deflection shall be as required for each specific equipment application, but not less than that specified herein when supported on a solid concrete structural slab having a thickness of not less than four (4) inches. If vibration isolators with a deflection greater than the minimum specified are required to meet the noise criteria for the adjacent spaces, suitable isolation system shall be submitted. Should vibration isolators installed for the equipment prove inadequate to prevent transmission of equipment vibrations to the building structure or limit equipment vibration originated noise in the building spaces to acceptable levels, the isolators shall be replaced with units having the largest deflection that can be practicably installed. 5. Where designated in the schedules, spring and combination rail and spring isolation supports are for installation with equipment structurally built or supported on a rigid structural steel frame suitable for these types of isolation. Where these types of isolation are not suitable for the equipment construction or operation, the equipment shall be mounted on a structural steel base as herein specified. 6. Isolator types are scheduled to establish minimum standards. At the Contractor's option, labor-saving accessories can be an integral part of isolators supplied to provide initial lift of equipment to operating height, hold piping at fixed elevations during installation and initial system filling operations, and similar installation advantages. Accessories and seismic restraint features must not degrade the isolation performance of the isolators. 7. Static deflection of isolators shall be as provided in the EXECUTION section and as shown on the drawings. All static deflections stated are the minimum acceptable deflection for the mounts under actual load. Isolators selected solely on the basis of rated deflections are not acceptable and will be disapproved. MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

321 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators. 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 100 psig. 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. D. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washerreinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 2.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES A. Manufacturers: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. B-Line Systems, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corp. 4. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 5. Loos & Co., Inc.; Cableware Technology Division. 6. Mason Industries, Inc. 7. TOLCO Incorporated. 8. Unistrut Diversified Products Co.; Wayne Manufacturing Division. 9. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 10. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc. 11. Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund. B. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1-piece, molded, bridge-bearing neoprene MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

322 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 40, plus or minus 5, with a flat washer face. C. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made of steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable engagement. D. General Requirements: 1. Equipment, piping, ductwork and conduit shall be braced and supported in accordance with International Building Code, Chapter This Contractor shall provide the services of a professionally registered Seismic consultant to perform duties indicated below. The Contractor shall submit with his bid, the hourly billing rate for their Seismic consultant to provide additional services beyond the specified scope.. E. Mechanical Equipment: 1. All equipment bases and mounting tabs shall be provided integral to the equipment and designed to distribute Seismic loads without failure. Equipment bases mounting tabs shall be certified by the manufacturer to be in accordance with the requirements of this specification. 2. The size, type and quantity of anchors and fasteners required to anchor the equipment will be provided in accordance with the Seismic consultant. 3. Equipment submittals shall include Seismic anchoring details. F. HVAC Ductwork: G. Piping 1. Attachments and supports for HVAC ductwork systems shall be designed to meet the force and displacement provisions of SEI/ASCE 7-05 Standard. 1. Attachments and supports for piping systems shall be designed to meet the force and displacement provisions of SEI/ASCE 7-05 Standard. H. Mechanical Equipment, Attachments and Supports 1. Attachments and supports for mechanical equipment shall be designed to meet the force and displacement provisions of SEI/ASCE 7-05 Standard. I. The Seismic details indicated on the drawings are not intended to limit the Contractor. Alternated methods of support, attachment and bracing must be designed by the Seismic Consultant and submitted to the Architect for review. J. Sprinkler and standpipe system piping shall be supported and braced in accordance with MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

323 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 NFPA 13 and NFPA RESILIENT PENETRATION SLEEVE/SEAL A. Resilient penetration sleeve/seals shall be field-fabricated from a pipe or sheet metal section that is 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch larger than the penetrating element in all directions around the element, and shall be used to provide a sleeve through the construction penetrated. The sleeve shall extend one (1) inch beyond the penetrated construction on each side. The space between the sleeve and the penetrating element shall be packed with glass fiber or mineral wool to within 1/4 inch of the ends of the sleeve. The remaining 1/4 inch space on each end shall be filled with acoustical sealant to form an airtight seal. The penetrating element shall be able to pass through the sleeve without contacting the sleeve. Alternatively, prefabricated sleeves accomplishing the same result are acceptable. 2.5 RESILIENT LATERAL SUPPORTS A. These units shall either be a standard product of the vibration isolation mounting manufacturer, or be custom fabricated from standard components. These units shall incorporate neoprene isolation elements that are specifically designed to provide resilient lateral bracing of ducts or pipes. 2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Flexible duct connections shall be made from coated fabric. The clear space between connected parts shall be a minimum of three (3) inches and the connection shall have a minimum of 1.5 inches of slack material. 2.7 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Flexible pipe connections shall be fabricated of multiple plys of nylon cord, fabric, and neoprene; and shall be vulcanized so as to become inseparable and homogeneous. Flexible connections shall be formed in a double sphere shape, and shall be able to accept compressive, elongating, transverse, and angular movements. B. The flexible connections shall be selected and specially fitted, if necessary, to suit the system temperature, pressure, and fluid type. In addition, suitable flexible connections should be selected which do not require rods or cables to control extension of the connector. C. Connectors for pipe sizes two (2) inches or smaller shall have threaded female union couplings on each end. Larger sizes shall be fitted with metallic flange couplings. MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

324 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase GROMMETS: A. Grommets shall be specially formed to prevent bolts from directly contacting the isolator base plate, and shall be sized so that they will be loaded within the manufacturer's recommended load range. B. Grommets shall either be custom made by combining a neoprene washer and sleeve, or a manufactured product: 2.9 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT: A. Sealants for acoustical purposes as described in this specification shall be silicone or a nonsetting sealants FLEXIBLE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Type A: 1. Flexible Electrical Connection Type A shall be a prefabricated unit incorporating a flexible and watertight outer jacket, grounding strap, plastic inner sleeve to maintain smooth wire way, and end hubs with tapered electrical threads to fit standard threaded rigid metal conduit. 2. Flexible Electrical Connection Type A shall be Crouse-Hinds "XD Expansion/Deflection Coupling", Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co. "Type DF Expansion and Deflection Fitting", or approved equal. B. Type B: C. Type C: 2.11 FACTORY FINISHES 1. Flexible Electrical Connection Type B shall be field fabricated using a minimum two (2) foot length of flexible conduit or cable. 1. Flexible Electrical Connection Type C shall be field fabricated using a minimum equal four (4) foot length of flexible conduit or cable. A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping. 1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be electrogalvanized. Hot-dip galvanized metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use. MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

325 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate capacity range. A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATION: A. General: 1. Refer to the PRODUCTS section of this specification for vibration isolation devices identified on the drawings or specified herein. 2. The static deflections of all isolators specified herein are the minimum acceptable deflections for the mounts under actual load. Isolators selected solely on the basis of rated deflection are not acceptable and will be disapproved. B. Major Equipment: C. Pipes: 1. Types and minimum static deflections of vibration isolation devices for major equipment items shall be as specified hereinafter. 2. Flexible duct connections shall be installed at all fan unit intakes, fan unit discharges, and wherever else shown on the drawings. 3. Flexible pipe connections shall be installed at all pipe connections to equipment and machines with rotating parts. 4. Electrical connections to vibration-isolated equipment shall be flexible, as called for in the electrical portion of this specification. 5. Thrust restraints shall be installed on all suspended fans and on all floor-mounted fans developing three (3) inches or more of static pressure, unless the horizontal component of the thrust force can be demonstrated to be less than ten (10) percent of the equipment weight. 6. Each electric motor shall be mounted on the same foundation as the driven machine. Piping connections, including strainer at pumps, shall be supported on the same foundation as the pumps. MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

326 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. All chilled and heating water and drain piping that is connected to vibrationisolated equipment shall be isolated from the building structure at their first three support points. 2. Piping shall be isolated from the building structure by means of vibration isolators, resilient lateral supports, and resilient penetration sleeve/seals. 3. Isolators for the first three support points adjacent to connected equipment shall achieve one half the specified static deflection of the isolators supporting the connected equipment. When the required static deflection of these isolators is greater than 1/2 inch, spring neoprene isolators shall be used. When the required static deflection is less than or equal to 1/2 inch, neoprene isolators shall be used. All other pipe support isolators within the specified limits shall be either neoprene achieving at least 1/4 inch static deflection. 4. Where lateral support of pipes is required within the specified limits, this shall be accomplished by use of resilient lateral supports. 5. Pipes within the specified limits that penetrate the building construction shall be isolated from the building structure by use of resilient penetration sleeve/seals. 6. Provide flexible pipe connections as called for under Major Equipment above and wherever shown on the drawings. D. Ductwork: 1. All sheet metal ducts and air plenums that are connected to vibration-isolated equipment shall be isolated from the building structure at their first three support points by neoprene isolators. All isolators shall achieve 0.1 inch minimum static deflection. 2. Ducts within the specified limits that penetrate the building construction shall be isolated from the building structure by use of resilient penetration sleeve/seals. 3. Flexible duct connections shall be provided as called for above under Major Equipment and wherever shown on the drawings. E. Mechanical Equipment: 3.3 INSTALLATION 1. Electrical connections to vibration isolated mechanical equipment shall be made using flexible electrical connections Type A or Type C. A. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on either side of equipment. B. General: 1. Locations of all vibration isolation devices shall be selected for ease of inspection and adjustment as well as for proper operation. 2. Installation of vibration isolation equipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3. In all cases, isolated electrical equipment shall be positioned so that it is free standing and does not come in rigid contact with the building structure or other MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

327 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 systems. 4. Isolators: a. All vibration isolators shall be aligned squarely above or below mounting points of the supported equipment. b. Isolators for equipment with bases shall be located on the sides of the bases which are parallel to the equipment shaft unless this is not possible because of physical constraints. c. Locate isolators to provide stable support for equipment, without excess rocking. Consideration shall be given to the location of the center of gravity of the system and the location and spacing of the isolators. If necessary, a base with suitable footprint shall be provided to maintain stability of supported equipment, whether or not such a base is specifically called for herein. d. Hanger rods for vibration-isolated support shall be connected to structural beams or joists, not the floor slab between beams and joists. Provide suitable intermediate support members as necessary. e. Vibration isolation hanger elements shall be positioned as high as possible in the hanger rod assembly, but not in contact with the building structure, and so that the hanger housing may rotate a full 360 degrees about the rod axis without contacting any object. f. Parallel running pipes may be hung together on a trapeze that is isolated from the building. Isolator deflections must be the greatest required by the provisions for pipe isolation for any single pipe on the trapeze. Do not mix isolated and unisolated pipes on the same trapeze. g. Pipes, ducts and equipment shall not be supported from other pipes, ducts and equipment. h. Resiliently isolated pipes, ducts and equipment shall not come in rigid contact with the building construction or rigidly supported equipment. i. Adjust all leveling bolts and hanger rod bolts so that the isolated equipment is level and in proper alignment with connecting ducts or pipes. 5. Bases: a. No equipment unit shall bear directly on vibration isolators unless its own frame is suitably rigid to span between isolators and such direct support is approved by the equipment manufacturer. This provision shall apply whether or not a base frame is called for on the schedule. In the case that a base frame is required for the unit because of the equipment manufacturer's requirements and is not specifically called for on the equipment schedule, a base frame recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided at no additional expense. b. Unless otherwise indicated, there is to be a minimum operating clearance of one (1) inch between steel rails, steel frame bases or inertia bases and the floor beneath the equipment. The isolator mounting brackets shall be positioned and the isolators adjusted so that the required clearance is maintained. The clearance space shall be checked by the Contractor to MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

328 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 ensure that no construction debris has been left to short circuit or restrict the proper operation of the vibration isolation system. 6. Flexible Duct Connections: a. Sheet metal ducts and plenum openings shall be squarely aligned with the fan discharge, fan intake, or adjacent duct section prior to installation of the flexible connection, so that the clear length is approximately equal all the way around the perimeter. Flexible duct connections shall not be installed until this provision is met. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between connected sections, and the fabric shall not be stretched taut. 7. Flexible Pipe Connections: a. Install flexible pipe connections in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 8. Resilient Penetration Sleeve/Seals: a. Maintain an airtight seal around the penetrating element and prevent rigid contact between the penetrating element and the building structure. Fit the sleeve tightly to the building construction and seal airtight on both sides of the construction penetrated with acoustical sealant. 9. Flexible Electrical Connections: a. Type C connections shall be installed in a grossly slack "U" shape or a 360 degree loop. b. Rigid conduit on the isolated-equipment side of the flexible connection, and the flexible connection itself, shall not be tied to the building construction or other rigid structures. C. Install seismic snubbers on isolated equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure. D. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. E. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron clamps to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods. F. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts. MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

329 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. C. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop. D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism. E. Adjust active height of spring isolators. F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations. G. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. H. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to resist seismic forces. 3.5 CLEANING A. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-control devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-mounting systems. Refer to Division VIBRATION ISOLATOR AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT SCHEDULE Vibration Isolation Schedule Equipment Isolation Type Base Deflection Base Type Remarks Suspended Fan Coil Units First Three (3) Pipe Hangers near Isolated Spring Isolators 0.5 Integral Base Rail Spring Hangers 1.5" MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

330 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 Equipment First Two (2) Pipe Hangers near Non- Isolated Equipment Spring Hangers 1.0" SEISMIC INSTALLATION INSPECTION A. On completion of installation of all vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices herein specified, a representative of the isolation materials manufacturer shall inspect the completed system and report in writing any installation errors, improperly selected isolation or restraint devices, or other faults that could affect the performance of the system. Contractor shall submit a report to the Architect, including the manufacturer's representative s final report, indicating all isolation reported as properly installed or requiring correction, and include a report by the Contractor on steps taken to properly complete the isolation work. B. All special inspections must be performed in accordance with IBC END OF SECTION MECHANICAL VIBRATION, SOUND AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

331 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION TESTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following: 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1. Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Variable-air-volume systems. 2. Hydronic Piping Systems: a. Variable-flow systems. 3. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings. 4. Existing systems TAB. 5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 6. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section. A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper. B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to design quantities. C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors, and other pollutants. D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated. E. NC: Noise criteria. TESTING AND BALANCING

332 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results. G. RC: Room criteria. H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order. I. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump. J. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side. K. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. L. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested. M. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. N. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system. O. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment. P. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and reporting TAB procedures. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Work included in this section must be performed by an independent testing and balancing agency and an approved member of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) who shall provide a complete and comprehensive total system balance process to test, adjust, and balance the air and water systems for this project. Submit the name of the air balance firm for approval within thirty (30) days after award of contract. See Section for approved Contractors. B. If the Contractor fails to submit the name of an acceptable agency within the specified time, the Architect will select a firm to accomplish the work, and the selection shall be binding at no additional cost to the Owner. C. All work shall be performed under direct supervision of a qualified engineer. All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. If TESTING AND BALANCING

333 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 requested, calibration tests of equipment to be used shall be performed in the presence of the Architect. D. Submit for review and approval within ten (10) working days after the notice to proceed, the names of the personnel who will be responsible for the work and those who will actually perform the testing and balancing and their qualification, which shall demonstrate that they have balanced and tested systems of comparable size and complexity. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Certified TAB Reports: Submit six copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm. B. Warranties specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB. B. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. 1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following: a. Submittal distribution requirements. b. The Contract Documents examination report. c. TAB plan. d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements. e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow. C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." TESTING AND BALANCING

334 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems and NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification." F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer. 1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities. B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. 1.9 WARRANTY A. National Project Performance Guarantee: If AABC standards are used, provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: B. Special Guarantee: If NEBB standards are used, provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Guarantee includes the following provisions: 1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. TESTING AND BALANCING

335 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase TEST PROCEDURE 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits. A. System may be tested in sections when approved by the Architect. B. When testing and balancing involve the building temperature control systems, cooperate with the temperature control subcontractor to achieve the desired results. C. At the time of final inspection, recheck in the presence and at the request of the Architect not to exceed ten (10) percent of the previously recorded readings from the certified report selected at random from the log by the Architect. D. Permanently mark the settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Do not permanently mark devices before final acceptance. E. Perform all tests in accordance with AABC standard procedures. Any deviation from same must be approved by the Architect. F. Should the basic system or any of its components fail to meet contract requirements, and thereby make the testing and balancing work invalid, notify the Architect and stop all tests until such time that the failure is corrected. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST INSTRUMENTS A. Use instruments of equal or better quality than those described in the technical portions of Associated Air Balance Council--"National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems, Fifth Edition B. Instruments used for balancing air and water systems must have been calibrated within a period of six (6) months prior to balancing. C. List in the report types, serial numbers, and dates of calibration of all instruments used in the final air and water balance tests. D. Instrumentation shall include, as a minimum, the following items of equipment: 1. Pressure gauges and fittings. 2. Dry bulb and wet bulb thermostats. 3. Contact pyrometer. 4. Portable flow meter and, if required, orifice plates. TESTING AND BALANCING

336 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 5. Pitot tube and manometers. 6. Alnor Velometer with attachments. 7. Amprobe. 8. Tachometer. 9. Special wrenches and tools. A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. 1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of Contract. 2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. C. Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents." D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment performance data including fan curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions. F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed. G. Examine system and equipment test reports. TESTING AND BALANCING

337 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing. J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. K. Examine fan coil units to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. L. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations. M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. N. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. O. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: 1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals. 4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected. 5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. 6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at design values. 9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values. P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. TESTING AND BALANCING

338 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated design conditions for system operations can be met. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project. C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fanspeed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. All air distribution systems including supply, return, outdoor air and exhaust ductwork shall be tested and balanced. B. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. TESTING AND BALANCING

339 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 C. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. D. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. E. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. F. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. G. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. H. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. I. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. J. Check for airflow blockages. K. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. L. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components. M. Check for proper sealing of air duct system. N. Where the system cannot be properly balanced or equipment tested due to system deficiencies such as inability to properly adjust fan speeds, improperly sized motors, excessively noisy equipment, malfunctioning controls, excessively out of balance air distribution system branch runs, and similar items, furnish to the Architect in writing a list of the deficiencies prior to the submission of the test report. O. Verify operation of each room thermostat serving variable air volume terminal units over full range of heating and cooling to insure proper sequence of control of the variable air volume operator and reheat coil valve. P. Field test maximum and minimum air volumes of all variable air volume terminal units and record final settings. Check factory settings of regulators and controllers before tests. Reset to the scheduled air volumes if required. Q. Work in conjunction with the Automatic Temperature Control Contractor and Architect to establish maximum and minimum settings on all variable air volume fans. 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed TESTING AND BALANCING

340 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 listed by the fan manufacturer. 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment. a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters. 3. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 4. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes. 5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. TESTING AND BALANCING

341 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level and tank pressure. 3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type, unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. D. Where liquid flow balancing cannot be accomplished due to system deficiencies such as excessive or lack of pumping head, inadequately sized motors, pressure drops not determinable or similar problems, prepare a list of such deficiencies and the suggested system modifications and furnish to the Architect in writing and prior to submission of test report for necessary action. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive- TESTING AND BALANCING

342 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 displacement pumps: 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. 2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved. 3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design. B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. 1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressuredrop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device. D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than design flow. E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows: 1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices. F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor-air temperature. G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance systems with automatic two and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. TESTING AND BALANCING

343 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR EQUIPMENT A. Conduct performance tests only after the air and water systems have been balanced and the proper flow rates established. B. Test and record capacity of heat transfer equipment including all coils. Air side and water side capacities must agree within five (5) percent of each other. Include the manufacturer's rated capacity at the test operating conditions with the report. Perform tests where possible at design conditions. If tests are not performed under design conditions, interpolate results to determine capacity at full load operating conditions. C. Calculate efficiency of pumps and fans by recognized methods using test data. D. Test refrigeration equipment to determine heat extracted from or heat added to the building by the equipment and the heat ejected from the device. Record date, time and outside weather conditions including ambient dry bulb, wet bulb, wind speed and direction, cloud cover, rain, and any special conditions pertinent to the test PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Entering- and leaving-water temperatures. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. TESTING AND BALANCING

344 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 7. Air pressure drop PROCEDURES TEMPERATURE TESTING A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system. B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied. C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused. 1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. 2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 3. Check the refrigerant charge. 4. Check the condition of filters. 5. Check the condition of coils. 6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate drain trap. 7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies. B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. 1. New filters are installed. 2. Coils are clean and fins combed. 3. Drain pans are clean. 4. Fans are clean. 5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. 6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected. C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work. 1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows and determine the new fan, speed, filter, and coil face velocity. 2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face TESTING AND BALANCING

345 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. 3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated airflow and water flow rates. If 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required. 4. Air balance each air outlet TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned. B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions. C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements. D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers). E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators. F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems. I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations. J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply. K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations REPORTING A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. TESTING AND BALANCING

346 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors FINAL REPORT A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following: 1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers' test data. 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data. D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents, including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract TESTING AND BALANCING

347 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following: a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. F. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. TESTING AND BALANCING

348 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number of belts, make, and size. 3. Test Data: (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. G. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System and air-handling unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig. H. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Test apparatus used. d. Area served. e. Air-terminal-device make. f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram. g. Air-terminal-device type and model number. h. Air-terminal-device size. i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft.. 2. Test Data: (Indicated and actual values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. TESTING AND BALANCING

349 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F. I. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type. 2. Test Data: (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering-water temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig. e. Entering-air temperature in deg F. f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. J. Instrument Calibration Reports: 3.17 INSPECTIONS 1. Report Data: A. Initial Inspection: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the Final Report. 2. Randomly check the following for each system: a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. TESTING AND BALANCING

350 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Final Inspection: 3.18 ADDITIONAL TESTS b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to the set point. d. Measure sound levels at two locations. e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations. f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report. 1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Architect. 2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Architect. 3. Architect shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. 4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." 5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. 6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report. 7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the final payment. A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspections, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTION TESTING AND BALANCING

351 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SCOPE A. The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements and all other Specification Sections apply to the work specified in this section. In the event of conflict between specific requirements of the various documents, the more restrictive, the more extensive (i.e.: more expensive) requirement shall govern. A. Work included in this section is the thermal insulating done in the field, on the Division 21, 22 and 23 systems as specified herein. B. Work excluded in this Section are the following: 1. Thermal building insulation. 2. Sound absorbing duct lining. C. The requirements of Division 23, Section Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions shall apply to the work specified under this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The k factor means the number of British thermal units of heat transmitted per (sq. ft.) (Fahrenheit temperature difference) through a material with flat, parallel sides one (1) inch apart. The material shall be tested and rated according to ASTM Test Method C B. Unless otherwise specified, the term "concealed", as used in this specification, shall include all items hidden from normal sight. This includes items within furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, above suspended ceilings and within return air plenums. C. Unless otherwise specified, the work "exposed" shall refer to all work other than "concealed" work. D. Unless otherwise specified, the term "exterior", as used in this specification, shall include all items being or situated outside. E. Unless otherwise specified, the term "conditioned", as used in this specification, shall be a heated or cooled space, or both, within a building and, where required, provided with MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION

352 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase SUBMITTALS humidification or dehumidification means, so as to be capable of maintaining a space condition falling within the comfort envelope set forth in ASHRAE 55. A. Provide shop drawings in accordance with Division 23, Sections Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions and the General Requirements which shall include all insulation, jackets, finishes, corner beads, pump covers, etc. Shop drawings shall additionally describe each system or component to be insulated, insulation type and thickness, and method of installation. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, watervapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any). C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties. 6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smokedeveloped index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smokedeveloped index of 150 or less. MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION

353 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields. B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All insulating materials, including adhesives, jackets and coatings, to be used on the project must be delivered to the building in the manufacturer's unopened container and must bear the manufacturer's stamp or label giving name of manufacturer, brand and description of material. B. After the necessary tests have been conducted to prove the water and air systems tight, all piping, ductwork and equipment to be insulated shall be thoroughly cleaned and then covered. Insulation materials shall be the product of Owens Corning, CSG, Schuller or Armacell equal to the products specified herein. 2.2 TYPES OF INSULATION A. Type I - Pipe Insulation: 1. Provide heavy density fiberglass pipe insulation with vapor barrier jacket. The k factor shall not be more than 0.23 at seventy-five (75) degrees Fahrenheit mean temperature. Insulation shall be equal to Johns Manville Micro-Lok meeting ASTM C 547 with FSK jacket. B. Type II - Pipe Insulation: MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION

354 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1. Provide closed cell elastomeric tubular insulation with built-in vapor barrier. The k factor shall not be more than 0.25 at seventy-five (75) degrees Fahrenheit mean temperature. Insulation shall be equal to Armacell AP Armaflex or AP Armaflex SS. The use of polyethylene, polyolefin or engineered polymer insulation is prohibited. C. Type IV - Duct Insulation: 1. Provide blanket type lightweight fiberglass duct insulation with vapor barrier facing. The compressed k-factor shall not exceed 0.27 at seventy-five (75) degrees Fahrenheit mean temperature and a minimum installed R-Value of 6.0 (hr ft2 F)/Btu. Insulation shall be equal to Johns Manville flexible fiberglass blanket Microlite XG Formaldehyde-free Type 100 meeting ASTM C 553 with factory-applied FSK facing. D. Type V - Duct and Equipment Insulation: 1. Provide board type fiberglass insulation with vapor barrier facing. The k factor shall not exceed 0.22 at seventy-five (75) degrees Fahrenheit mean temperature, and the density shall not be less than 6.0 pounds per cubic foot (pcf). Insulation shall be equal to Johns Manville 817 Spin-Glas meeting ASTM C 612 with FSK facing. E. Type XII Piping Insulation 1. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. a. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I b. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III c. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV d. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1 e. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2 f. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C ADHESIVES, SEALERS AND COATINGS A. The vapor barrier on all insulation systems shall be maintained at all times. Any penetration into the vapor barrier shall be sealed vapor tight. All joints, fittings etc shall be sealed vapor tight. B. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. They shall not corrode, soften or otherwise attach such material in either the wet or dry MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION

355 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 state and must be suitable for the service temperatures. C. Any cement, sealer or coating used shall be resistant to vermin and mold and shall be durable. It shall not discolor on aging; and where applied on the final surface of the insulation, it shall be light in color and be capable of being painted. D. For indoor applications: 1. Use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Adhesives, coatings and compounds shall be equal to the following: 1. Vapor barrier adhesive for sealing joints on pipe and duct insulation - Foster Adhesive for installing canvas jackets - Foster Adhesive for installing duct insulation - Foster and Adhesive for installing cellular-glass insulation - Foster Brand Adhesive for installing elatomeric insulation - Foster Brand 85-75, Armaflex Adhesive for installing mineral-fiber insulation - Foster Brand 85-60/85-70, Childers CP Adhesive for ASJ, FSK and PVDC jackets - Foster Brand 85-50, Childers CP Joint sealants for cellular-glass insulation - Foster Brand 30-45, Childers CP FSK and metal jacket flashing sealants - Foster Brand 95-44, Childers CP ASJ, vinyl, PVDC, and PVC jacket flashing sealants - Childers Brand CP Two coats of WB Armaflex finish or glass mesh with mastic for all Armaflex located outside. 2.4 FITTING AND VALVE COVERS A. Pipe fittings and valves shall be insulated with Zeston premold one (1) piece PVC insulated fitting cover and factory precut insulation. Fittings shall have edges of one (1) piece cover sealed with Zeston vapor barrier pressure sensitive tape. 2.5 METALLIC COMPONENTS A. Staples shall be outward clinching type of 304 or 316 stainless steel. B. Bands shall be galvanized steel, aluminum, brass, or nickel-copper alloy, of 3/4 inch nominal width. The band thickness, exclusive of coating, shall be not less than inch for steel and nickel copper alloy, inch for aluminum, and 0.01 inch for brass. C. Wire shall be fourteen (14) gauge, nickel-copper alloy or copper clad steel, or sixteen (16) gauge, soft annealed, galvanized steel. MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION

356 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 D. Wire netting used for exposed surfaces of insulation that is to be cement finished shall be twenty-two (22 gauge, one (1) inch galvanized mesh, with continuous twenty-six (26) gauge galvanized steel corner beads having 2-1/2 inch wings. E. Protect external corners on insulation of ducts and equipment exposed in occupied spaces by corner beads two (2) inches by two (2) inches,.016 inch thick aluminum adhered to heavy duty Kraft paper. F. All exterior piping and ductwork shall be additionally covered with a sixteen (16) mil embossed aluminum weatherproof jacket. Jacketing shall be ITW's Lock-On (Childers) type with an integrally bonded polysurlyn moisture retarder over the entire surface in contact with the insulation. Jackets are to be fabricated with continuous modified Pittsburg Z-lock on the longitudinal seam and each butted section of jacketing shall be joined and sealed with factory fabricated butt strap and sealant. Fittings shall be insulated and weatherproofed using similar materials. 2.6 INSULATION SCHEDULE: A. Insulation materials furnished must meet the minimum thickness requirements of National Voluntary Consensus Standard 90.1 (current accepted edition), Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings of the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). Service Type Thickness B. Domestic Water Pipe (Hot, Cold, Tempered, & I 1" Recirc.,) Optional sizes 1" and smaller I ½ C. Domestic Water Piping Concealed in Walls and Cabinet Enclosures II ½ D. Air Conditioning Condensate I 1" Optional II ½ E. Chilled Water Supply and Return 1. 1 ¼ or smaller II 1" 2. 1 ½ and larger XII 1 ½ 3. 1 ½ and larger (exterior, above-grade) XII 2" F. Heating Water Supply and Return MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION

357 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase ½ or smaller I 1" 2. 2" and larger I 2" G. Air Conditioning Supply and Outdoor Air Ductwork 1. Concealed IV 2" 2. Exposed V 2" 3. Air Device Bodies V 1 H. Air Conditioning Return Ductwork PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL: 1. Exposed V 1" A. All insulation shall be installed by skilled workmen regularly engaged in this type of work. B. Insulation shall be continuous at all hangers, hanger rods, supports, sleeves and openings. Continuous vapor barrier must be provided for all cold surfaces. Insulation shall be sealed where it terminates because of a valve, union, flange, etc. C. Provide continuous insulation and jacketing when passing thru interior wall, floor, and ceiling construction. 1. At Through Penetration Firestops: Coordinate insulation densities with the requirements of approved firestop system being installed. 2. Insulation densities required by approved firestop system may vary with the densities specified in this Section. When this occurs use the higher density insulation. D. Do not intermix different insulation materials on individual runs of piping or ductwork. E. Arrange to permit expansion and contraction without causing damage to insulation or surface. F. Actual insulation thickness must be at least equal to the minimum specified in the schedule at all locations including supports in contact with cold surfaces. Where the manufacturer's rated or nominal thickness is less than the minimum specified, a thicker material or more layers will be requested so that the stated minimum thickness will be MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION

358 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 attained or exceeded. G. Install insulation materials in a first class manner with smooth and even surfaces. Scrap pieces of insulation shall not be used where a full length section will fit. H. Unless otherwise specified herein, the application of all insulation materials, accessories and finishes shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations. I. Insulation materials shall not be applied until all surfaces to be covered are clean and dry; all foreign material, such as rust, scale, dirt, etc., has been removed, and where specified, surfaces have been painted. Insulation shall be clean and dry when installed and during the application of any finish. The insulation on pipe fittings, valves and pipe joints shall not be installed before the piping is tested and approved. J. Omit insulation of the following unless directed otherwise. 1. Brass or copper pipe specified to be chrome plated. 2. Traps and pressure reducing valves, relief piping from safety valves, and unions, flanges and expansion joints on heating water system. 3. All fire protection piping. 4. Existing adjacent insulation. 5. ASME stamps, manufacturer's nameplates. 6. Access plates on fan housings. 7. Cleanouts or handholes. 8. Components within factory preinsulated HVAC equipment. 9. Factory - preinsulated flexible ductwork and HVAC equipment. 10. Vibration - isolating connections. K. Replace and repair insulation disturbed by testing and balancing procedures required under Division 23, Section Testing and Balancing. 3.2 PIPE INSULATION A. High density pipe saddles shall be provided at all points of support as hereinbefore specified. B. Insulate all valves and strainers. Use premolded covers and factory precut insulation where applicable. Unions and flanges shall not be insulated except on cold services. C. Insulate valves up to and including bonnets, except for cold water valves which shall be insulated over packing nuts in a manner to permit removal for adjustment and repacking. D. Insulate strainers in a manner to permit removal of the basket without disturbing the insulation of the strainer. Obtain Architect's approval of installation method. MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION

359 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 E. Insulate all exposed piping under lavatories and sinks with a white, fitted/molded antimicrobial undersink pipe cover equal to Truebro Lav Guard 2. Cover shall have internal, E-Z Tear-To-Fit trim feature for square, clean trimming (internal ribs) and builtin, concealed E-Z Grip fasteners (no cable-tie fasteners allowed). F. Application - Type I Insulation: 1. Insulate all pipes in a neat and workmanlike manner. Seal all longitudinal laps of jackets and staple every six (6) inches. Where the piping operates below ambient temperature, the staples shall be coated with vapor barrier adhesive. All butt joints shall be wrapped with a three (3) inch minimum wide strip of jacketing material securely sealed in place. 2. Insulate valves and fittings with pre-cut blanket type fiberglass insulation and PVC covers as specified. Insulation shall be of the same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edges adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked, fully insulating the pipe fitting. The one (1) piece PVC fitting cover shall then be secured by stapling, tack fastening, banding or taping the ends to the adjacent pipe covering. Chilled water supply and return piping and cold water systems piping shall be insulated as above and have all seam edges of the cover sealed with ZESTON vapor barrier adhesive mastic. The circumferential edges of cover shall be wrapped with ZESTON vapor barrier pressure sensitive color matching tape. The tape shall extend over the adjacent pipe insulation and overlap itself at least two (2) inches on the downward side. 3. Where fittings are operating above ambient they may, in lieu of the proceeding paragraph, be covered with a three (3) hour, hydraulic setting, combination insulating and finishing cement having k factor not greater than 0.87 at a mean temperature of 200 degrees Fahrenheit. The thickness of this cement shall be such that the surface is substantially flush with the pipe covering. Where the insulation terminates at a fitting that is not covered, the end of the insulation shall be beveled off with this same cement. All fittings insulated in this manner shall be covered by a fabric jacket as specified, which shall be cemented down with lagging adhesive. 4. Where expansion joints are required to be insulated, they shall be covered with readily removable sections of insulation of same composition and thickness as provided for adjacent piping. G. Application - Type II Insulation: 1. The material shall be slit lengthwise to permit installation or slipped over pipe before connections are made. Self-seal insulation may also be installed. 2. All joints and seams must be thoroughly bonded, both mechanically and hermetically, by the adhesive recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Also, the manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed as to the adhesive to use where the insulation needs bonding to metal or other material used for any surface treatment where a finish coat of paint is required. 3. All penetrations of the insulation must be thoroughly sealed so that the insulation itself will form a complete vapor barrier. Insulation shall run continuous at MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION

360 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 hangers and supports to form a complete vapor barrier. Wherever the insulation terminates, the edges shall be sealed to the metal. 4. Insulation shall be extended to stop valves under plumbing fixtures and/or within cabinets. Water and waste lines serving handicap plumbing fixtures shall be insulated and painted to match adjacent surface. H. Application -Type XII Insulation: 1. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: a. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. b. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. c. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. d. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vaporbarrier mastic and flashing sealant. 2. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: a. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. b. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. c. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. d. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. 3. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: a. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. b. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. 4. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: a. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. b. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. c. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION

361 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase DUCT INSULATION A. Provide accessories as required to prevent distortion and sagging of duct insulation. Provide welded pins, adhesive clips and wire ties as recommended by the manufacturer and directed by the Architect. B. Insulation shall cover all standing seams and metal surfaces. Provide corner beading on all exposed ducts. C. Staples shall be sealed to maintain vapor barrier. D. Neatly cut insulation at dampers, temperature control sensors, and controllers. Butter exposed edges with approved mastic coating. E. Application - Type IV Insulation: 1. Insulation shall be cut slightly longer than perimeter of duct to insure full thickness at corners. All insulation shall be applied with edges tightly stitched with staples. Provide vapor barrier mastic sealer at seam. The insulation shall be additionally secured to the bottom of all square ducts eighteen (18) inches or wider by means of welded pins and speed clips. The protruding ends of the pins shall be cut off flush after the speed clips have been applied. The vapor barrier facing shall be thoroughly sealed where the pins have pierced through with a tape of the same material by applying a vapor barrier adhesive to both surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. All hanger rods, support members, joints and penetrations of the vapor barrier shall be sealed with full thickness insulation and vapor barrier mastic sealer. All cuts or tears shall be sealed with strips of the aluminum foil tape and vapor barrier adhesive. F. Application - Type V Insulation: 1. All insulation shall be applied with edges tightly butted. Insulation shall be impaled on pins welded to the duct and secured with speed clips. Spacing of pins shall be as required to hold insulation firmly in place but not less than one (1) pin per square foot, and pins shall be placed within three (3) inches of each corner of insulation. All joints and penetrations of the vapor barrier shall be sealed with a three (3) inch wide strip of the same material, applied with Foster 85-75, or to both surfaces as recommended by the adhesive and vapor barrier mastic sealer manufacturer. 2. If, through space or size restriction or other causes, the welded pin method is impossible, the insulation shall be secured to the duct with adhesive such as Foster or equal. The adhesive shall cover the entire surface of the sheet metal when applied to underside of horizontal duct but may be applied in strips or spots for application to top and sides with a minimum of fifty (50) percent coverage. MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION

362 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase FABRIC JACKET A. Apply jacket to insulated breeching and equipment. Onto the dry cement surface apply a brush coat of Foster Sealfas at the rate of sixty (60) to seventy (70) square feet per gallon. Embed into wet coating the canvas jacket, smoothed out to avoid wrinkles and overlap all seams a minimum of two (2) inches. Apply a second brush coat of Sealfas to the entire surface at the rate of sixty (60) to seventy (70) square feet per gallon. B. Where jacket is to be installed on piping, apply Foster adhesive to the canvas jacket by dipping to completely wet and saturate the canvas. While wet, position on the pipe insulation and pull tight, bond, lap and smooth out all wrinkles. Finish with a sealer coat of adhesive. END OF SECTION MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION

363 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SCOPE A. The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements and all other Specification Sections apply to the work specified in this section. A. This section includes the controls, instrumentation and associated piping and wiring required to make the mechanical systems provided under Division 23 perform as described in these specifications and as shown. Provide a complete system of automatic temperature control of the direct digital type as manufactured only by Johnson Control, Inc. (JCI). The system shall be complete in all respects including all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary, and shall be installed by personnel regularly employed by the manufacturer. Provide a distributed process network control system complete with all necessary hardware and software including all programming. System shall be PC microprocessor based. The DDC systems for the Clinical Science Building 7 th floor Renovation shall be compatible with the MUSC campus DDC system. B. The Building Automation System (BAS) manufacturer shall furnish and install a fully integrated building automation system, incorporating direct digital control (DDC) for energy management, equipment monitoring and control, and subsystems with open communications capabilities as herein specified. C. The new system shall be an extension of and connected to the existing MUSC Johnson Controls, Inc. management system which is used for energy management. All setpoints and programs must be able to be modified and changed through the JCI user interface without additional hardware or gateways. D. The installation of the control system shall be performed under the direct supervision of the controls manufacturer with the shop drawings, flow diagrams, bill of materials, component designation or identification number and sequence of operation all bearing the name of the manufacturer. The installing manufacturer shall certify in writing, that the shop drawings have been prepared by the equipment manufacturer and that the equipment manufacturer has supervised their installation. In addition, the equipment manufacturer shall certify, in writing, that the shop drawings were prepared by their company and that all temperature control equipment was installed under their direct supervision. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

364 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 E. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for this and/or other systems and not custom designed especially for this project. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use for at least two years. F. BAS manufacturer shall be responsible for all BAS and Temperature Control wiring for a complete and operable system. All wiring shall be done in accordance with all local and national codes. 1.3 WORK BY OTHERS A. Mechanical contractor installs all wells, valves, taps, dampers, flow stations, etc. furnished by BAS manufacturer. B. Electrical Contractor provides: V power to all BAS and/or Temperature control panels. Where not shown on plans, locations shall be determined by the BAS contractor and coordinated with the Architect and electrical contractor. 2. Wiring of all power feeds through all disconnect starters to electrical motor. 3. Wiring of any remote start/stop switches and manual or automatic motor speed control devices not furnished by BAS manufacturer 4. Wiring of electrical sub-metering devices furnished by BAS manufacturer. C. Products furnished but not installed under this section 1. Control Valves 2. Flow Switches 3. Pressure and Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets 4. Flow Meters 5. Automatic Dampers 6. Airflow Stations 7. Digital Energy Meters D. Products installed but not furnished under this section 1. Smoke Detectors E. The control manufacturer shall cooperate with the air and water balancing agency in the performance of their work as required or directed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete sets of documentation in the following phased delivery schedule: 1. Valve and damper schedules BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

365 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. Equipment data cut sheets 3. System schematics, including: a. sequence of operations b. point names c. point addresses d. interface wiring diagrams e. panel layouts. f. system riser diagrams 4. AutoCAD compatible as-built drawings B. Upon project completion, submit operation and maintenance manuals, consisting of the following: 1.5 WARRANTY 1. Index sheet, listing contents in alphabetical order 2. Manufacturer's equipment parts list of all functional components of the system, Auto-CAD disk of system schematics, including wiring diagrams 3. Description of sequence of operations 4. As-Built interconnection wiring diagrams 5. Operator's Manual 6. Trunk cable schematic showing remote electronic panel locations, and all trunk data 7. List of connected data points, including panels to which they are connected and input device (ionization detector, sensors, etc.) 8. Conduit routing diagrams A. Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for the successful operation of the entire BAS system for a period of one year after substantial completion. B. The adjustment, required testing, and repair of the system includes all computer equipment, transmission equipment and all sensors and control devices. C. The on-line support services shall allow the local BAS subcontractor to dial out over telephone lines to monitor and control the facility's building automation system. This remote connection to the facility shall be within 2 hours of the time that the problem is reported. This coverage shall be extended to include normal business hours, after business hours, weekends and holidays. 1.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify control wires with a distinctive number on a nonconducting tag attached to each end or at junction points or by color coding of that wire or tube. Designate on control diagram the identifying color and/or number or other identifying designation used. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

366 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Identify all control equipment and devices, including panels, controllers, valves, and automatic dampers, firestats, etc., by a method approved by the Architect. Designations shall match those used on control diagrams and shop drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN A. Johnson Control, Inc. (JCI). B. System must extend and connect to the existing JCI network control systems installed in MUSC University. 2.2 NETWORKING COMMUNICATIONS A. The design of the BAS shall network operator workstations and stand alone DDC Controllers. The network architecture shall consist of multiple levels for communication efficiency, a site-wide (Management Level Network) Ethernet network based on TCP/IP protocol, high performance peer to peer building level network(s) and DDC Controller floor level local area networks with access being totally transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control programs. B. Peer to Peer Building Level Network: 1. All operator devices either network resident or connected via dial up modems shall have the ability to access all point status and application report data or execute control functions for any and all other devices via the peer to peer network. No hardware or software limits shall be imposed on the number of devices with global access to the network data at any time. 2. The peer-to-peer network shall support a minimum of 100 DDC controllers and PC workstations 3. Each PC workstation shall support a minimum of 4 peer to peer networks hardwired. 4. The system shall support integration of third party systems (boiler, chiller). This system shall exchange data between the two systems for interprocess control. All exchange points shall have full system functionality as specified herein for hardwired points. 2.3 DDC CONTROLLER FLOOR LEVEL NETWORK: A. This level communication shall support a family of application specific controllers and shall communicate with the peer to peer network through DDC Controllers for transmission of global data. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

367 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase DDC & HVAC MECHANLCAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS A. The DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall reside on the Building Level Network. B. DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall use the same programming language and tools. DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers which require different programming language or tools on a network are not acceptable. C. DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers which do not meet the functions specified for DDC Controllers or for HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers are not acceptable. 2.5 DDC CONTROLLER A. DDC Controllers shall be a 16-bit stand-alone, multi tasking, multi user, real time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware with plug in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies and input/output point modules. Controller size shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point I/O schedule. Each controller shall support a minimum of three (3) Floor Level Application Specific Controller Device Networks. B. Each DDC Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and databases, including: 1. Control processes 2. Energy management applications 3. Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for each level alarm for each point in the system. 4. Historical/trend data for points specified 5. Maintenance support applications 6. Custom processes 7. Operator I/O 8. Dial up communications 9. Manual override monitoring C. Each DDC Controller shall support firmware upgrades without the need to replace hardware. D. Provide all processors, power supplies and communication controllers so that the implementation of a point only requires the addition of the appropriate point input/output termination module and wiring. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

368 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 E. DDC Controllers shall provide a minimum two RS 232C serial data communication ports for operation of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, operator terminals, modems and portable laptop operator's terminals. DDC Controllers shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers or terminals. F. As indicated in the point I/O schedule, the operator shall have the ability to manually override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC Controller via local, point discrete, on board hand/off/auto operator override switches for digital control type points and gradual switches for analog control type points. 1. Switches shall be mounted either within the DDC Controllers key accessed enclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed to prevent unauthorized overrides. 2. DDC Controllers shall monitor the status of all overrides and inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. DDC Controllers shall also collect override activity information for reports. G. DDC Controllers shall provide local LED status indication for each digital input and output for constant, up to date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device. Graduated intensity LEDs or analog indication of value shall also be provided for each analog output. Status indication shall be visible without opening the panel door. H. Each DDC Controller shall continuously perform self diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components. The DDC Controller shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions or repeated failure to establish communication. I. Isolation shall be provided at all peer to peer network terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with: 1. RF-Conducted Immunity (RFCI) per ENV (IEC ) at 3 V 2. Electro Static Discharge (ESD) Immunity per EN (IEC ) at 8 kv air discharge, 4 kv contact 3. Electrical Fast Transient (EFT) per EN (IEC ) at 500 V signal, 1 kv power 4. Output Circuit Transients per UL 864 (2,400V, 10A, 1.2 Joule max) J. Isolation shall be provided at all peer to peer panel's AC input terminals to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with: 1. IEEE Standard UL 864 Supply Line Transients 3. Voltage Sags, Surge, and Dropout per EN (EN ) BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

369 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 K. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all DDC Controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery backup shall be provided to support the real time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 60 days. 1. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC Controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. 2. Should DDC Controller memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the DDC Controller via the local RS 232C port, via telephone line dial in or from a network workstation PC. 2.6 HVAC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS A. HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be a 12-bit stand-alone, multi tasking, multi user, real time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware with plug in enclosed processors. B. Each HVAC Mechanical Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and databases, including: 1. Control processes 2. Energy management applications 3. Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for each level alarm for each point in the system. 4. Historical/trend data for points specified 5. Maintenance support applications 6. Custom processes 7. Operator I/O 8. Dial up communications C. Each HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall support firmware upgrades without the need to replace hardware. D. HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide a RS 232C serial data communication port for operation of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, operator terminals, modems and portable laptop operator's terminals. E. HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide local LED status indication for each digital input and output for constant, up to date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

370 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 F. Each HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall continuously perform self diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all components. The HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions or repeated failure to establish communication. G. Isolation shall be provided at all peer to peer network terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with: 1. RF-Conducted Immunity (RFCI) per ENV (IEC ) at 3 V 2. Electro Static Discharge (ESD) Immunity per EN (IEC ) at 8 kv air discharge, 4 kv contact 3. Electrical Fast Transient (EFT) per EN (IEC ) at 500 V signal, 1 kv power 4. Output Circuit Transients per UL 864 (2,400V, 10A, 1.2 Joule max) H. Isolation shall be provided at all peer to peer panel's AC input terminals to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with: 1. IEEE Standard UL 864 Supply Line Transients 3. Voltage Sags, Surge, and Dropout per EN (EN ) I. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery backup shall be provided to support the real time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. 1. Upon restoration of normal power, the HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. 2. Should HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller via the local RS 232C port, via telephone line dial in or from a network workstation PC. 2.7 DDC & HVAC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER RESIDENT SOFTWARE FEATURES A. General: 1. The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral part of DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution. 2. All points shall be identified by up to 30 character point name and 16 character point descriptor. The same names shall be used at the PC workstation. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

371 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 3. All digital points shall have user defined two-state status indication (descriptors with minimum of 8 characters allowed per state (i.e. summer/winter). B. Control Software Description: 1. The DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall have the ability to perform the following pre tested control algorithms: a. Two position control b. Proportional control c. Proportional plus integral control d. Proportional, integral, plus derivative control e. Automatic tuning of control loops C. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide the following energy management routines for the purpose of optimizing energy consumption while maintaining occupant comfort. 1. Start Stop Time Optimization (SSTO) shall automatically be coordinated with event scheduling. The SSTO program shall start HVAC equipment at the latest possible time that will allow the equipment to achieve the desired zone condition by time of occupancy. The SSTO program shall also shut down HVAC equipment at the earliest possible time before the end of the occupancy period, and still maintain desired comfort conditions. a. The SSTO program shall operate in both the heating and cooling seasons. It shall be possible to apply the SSTO program to individual fan systems. The SSTO program shall operate on both outside weather conditions as well as inside zone conditions and empirical factors. b. The SSTO program shall meet the local code requirements for minimum outside air while the building is occupied. 2. Event Scheduling: Provide a comprehensive menu driven program to automatically start and stop designated points or groups of points according to a stored time. a. It shall be possible to individually command a point or group of points. b. For points assigned to one common load group, it shall be possible to assign variable time delays between each successive start or stop within that group. c. The operator shall be able to define the following information: 1) Time, day 2) Commands such as on, off, auto, and so forth. 3) Time delays between successive commands. 4) There shall be provisions for manual overriding of each schedule by an appropriate operator. d. It shall be possible to schedule events up to one year in advance. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

372 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 1) Scheduling shall be calendar based. 2) Holidays shall allow for different schedules. 3. Enthalpy switchover (economizer): The Energy Management Control Software (EMCS) will control the position of the air handler relief, return, and outside air dampers on units provided with economizer capability. If the outside air dry bulb temperature falls below changeover set point the EMCS will modulate the dampers to provide 100 percent outside air. The user will be able to quickly changeover to an economizer system based on dry bulb temperature and will be able to override the economizer cycle and return to minimum outside air operation at any time. 4. Automatic Daylight Savings Time Switchover: The system shall provide automatic time adjustment for switching to/from Daylight Savings Time. 5. Night setback control: The system shall provide the ability to automatically adjust setpoints for night control. 6. The Peak Demand Limiting (PDL) program shall limit the consumption of electricity to prevent electrical peak demand charges. a. PDL shall continuously track the amount of electricity being consumed, by monitoring one or more electrical kilowatt-hour/demand meters. These meters may measure the electrical consumption (kwh), electrical demand (kw), or both. b. PDL shall sample the meter data to continuously forecast the demand likely to be used during successive time intervals. c. If the PDL forecasted demand indicates that electricity usage is likely to exceed a user preset maximum allowable level, then PDL shall automatically shed electrical loads. d. Once the demand peak has passed, loads that have been shed shall be restored and returned to normal control. D. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be able to execute custom, job specific processes defined by the user, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines. 1. A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers on the network. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers on the network. Database shall support 30 character, English language point names, structured for searching and logs. 2. Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a specified device or cause the execution of a dial up connection to a remote device such as a printer or pager. 3. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall provide a HELP function key, providing enhanced context sensitive on-line help with task orientated information from the user manual. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

373 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 4. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall be capable of comment lines for sequence of operation explanation. E. Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm information to operator devices. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non critical alarms, minimize network traffic and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers ability to report alarms be affected by either operator or activity at a PC workstation, local I/O device or communications with other panels on the network. 1. All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English language description and the time and date of occurrence. 2. The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of six priority levels shall be provided for each point. Point priority levels shall be combined with user definable destination categories (PC, printer, DDC Controller, etc.) to provide full flexibility in defining the handling of system alarms. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start up. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point. 3. Alarm reports and messages will be directed to a user defined list of operator devices or PCs based on time (after hours destinations) or based on priority. 4. In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to print, display or store a 200 character alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response. 5. In dial up applications, operator selected alarms shall initiate a call to a remote operator device. F. A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be provided to manually or automatically sample, store and display system data for points as specified in the I/O summary. 1. Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for trending. Any point, regardless of physical location in the network, may be collected and stored in each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers point group. Two methods of collection shall be allowed: either by a pre defined time interval or upon a pre defined change of value. Sample intervals of l minute to 7 days shall be provided. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall have a dedicated RAM based buffer for trend data and shall be capable of storing a minimum of data samples. All trend data shall be available for transfer to a Workstation without manual intervention. 2. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall also provide high resolution sampling capability for verification of control loop performance. Operator initiated automatic and manual loop tuning algorithms shall be provided for operator selected PID control loops as identified in the point I/O summary. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

374 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 a. Loop tuning shall be capable of being initiated either locally at the DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller, from a network workstation or remotely using dial in modems. For all loop tuning functions, access shall be limited to authorized personnel through password protection. G. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be capable of automatically accumulating and storing run time hours for digital input and output points and automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals for analog and digital pulse input type points, as specified in the point I/O schedule. H. The peer to peer network shall allow the DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers to access any data from or send control commands and alarm reports directly to any other DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller or combination of controllers on the network without dependence upon a central or intermediate processing device. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall send alarm reports to multiple workstation without dependence upon a central or intermediate processing device. The peer to peer network shall also allow any DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller to access, edit, modify, add, delete, back up, and restore all system point database and all programs. I. The peer to peer network shall allow the DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers to assign a minimum of 50 passwords access and control priorities to each point individually. The logon password (at any PC workstation or portable operator terminal) shall enable the operator to monitor, adjust and control the points that the operator is authorized for. All other points shall not be displayed on the PC workstation or portable terminal (e.g. all base building and all tenant points shall be accessible to any base building operators, but only tenant points shall be accessible to tenant building operators). Passwords and priorities for every point shall be fully programmable and adjustable. 2.8 FLOOR LEVEL NETWORK APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC) A. Each DDC Controller shall be able to extend its performance and capacity through the use of remote application specific controllers (ASCs) through Floor Level LAN Device Networks. B. Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor based, multi tasking, real time digital control processor. Each ASC shall be capable of control of the terminal device independent of the manufacturer of the terminal device. C. Terminal Equipment Controllers: 1. Provide for control of each piece of equipment, including, but not limited to, the following: BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

375 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 a. Variable Air Volume (VAV) terminal units b. Constant Air Volume (CAV) terminal units c. Fan Coil Units 2. Controllers shall include all point inputs and outputs necessary to perform the specified control sequences. Analog outputs shall be industry standard signals such as 24V floating control, 3-15 psi pneumatic, 0-10v, allowing for interface to a variety of modulating actuators. 3. All controller sequences and operation shall provide closed loop control of the intended application. Closing control loops over the FLN, BLN or MLN is not acceptable. D. Digital Energy Monitors: 1. Furnish three phase digital watt-meters with pre-wired CTs for installation by the electrical contractor. Refer to electrical drawings for location and quantity. 2. All watt-meter electronics shall be housed within the CTs. CTs shall include sizes capable of mounting directly on a power bus. Diagnostics visible to the installing electrician (without a operator tool) shall indicate: proper operation, mis-wiring or low power-factor, device malfunction, and over-load condition. The meters shall include the following: a. The device shall be UL Listed, and shall comply with ANSI C12.1 accuracy specification. The minimum CT/meter combined accuracy shall be no greater than 1% of reading over the range of 5% to 100% of rated load. The meter shall not require calibration b. The wattmeter shall directly connect to power from 208 through 480 with no potential transformer. In-line fuses for each voltage tap phase shall be included. c. The wattmeter CTs shall be split-core and at minimum be sized to accommodate loads ranging from 100 to 2400 Amps. The CTs shall be volt-signal type, and shall not require shorting blocks. d. The wattmeter shall reside directly on the Floor Level Network along with other FLN devices. Data transferred shall include: 1) kw & kwh 2) Consumption 3) Demand 4) Power Factor 5) Current 6) Voltage 7) Apparent Power 8) Reactive Power BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

376 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase PERSONAL COMPUTER OPERATOR WORKSTATION HARDWARE (EXISTING) A. All new system software, graphics, point database information, and programming shall be added to the existing Personal computer operator workstation WORKSTATION OPERATOR INTERFACE (EXISTING) A. Basic Interface Description 1. Operator workstation interface software shall minimize operator training through the use of English language prompting, 30 character English language point identification, on-line help, and industry standard PC application software. The software shall provide, as a minimum, the following functionality: a. Real-time graphical viewing and control of environment. b. Scheduling and override of building operations. c. Collection and analysis of historical data. d. Point database editing, storage and downloading of controller databases. e. Alarm reporting, routing, messaging, and acknowledgment. B. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays 2.11 FIELD DEVICES 1. Color graphic floor plan displays and system schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment shall be installed under this contract. Graphics to be created include: a. Building floor plan with area temperatures displayed. b. Each air handling unit. c. Each air terminal unit. d. Chilled water system, including components and temperatures e. Hot water system, including components and temperatures A. Provide instrumentation as required for monitoring, control or optimization functions. B. Room Temperature Sensors 1. Digital room sensors shall have LCD display, day / night override button, and setpoint slide adjustment override options. The setpoint slide adjustment can be software limited by the automation system to limit the amount of room adjustment. Temperature monitoring range +20 F to 120 F Output signal Changing resistance Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5 F Set Point and Display Range 55 to 95 F BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

377 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. Liquid immersion temperature: Temperature monitoring range +30 F to 250 F Output signal Changing resistance Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5 F 3. Duct (single point) temperature: Temperature monitoring range +20 F to 120 F Output signal Changing resistance Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5 F 4. Duct Average temperature: Temperature monitoring range +20 F to 120 F Output signal 4 20 ma DC Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5 F Sensor Probe Length 25 feet long 5. Outside air temperature: Temperature monitoring range -58 F to 122 F Output signal 4 20 ma DC Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5 F C. Liquid Differential Pressure Transmitter Ranges 0-5/30 inches H /150 inches H /750 inches H 2 0 Output signal 4 20 ma DC Accuracy at Calibration point Zero and span Accuracy ± 0.2% of span Linearity ±0.1% of span Hysteresis ±0.05% of span D. Differential pressure: 1. Unit for fluid flow proof. Range Differential Maximum differential pressure Maximum pressure 2. Unit for air flow. Set point ranges: E. Static Pressure Sensor: Range 8 to 70 psi 3 psi 200 psi 325 psi 0 to 0.5 WG 0 to 1 WG 0 to 2 WG 0.5 WG to 1.0 WG 1.0 WG to 12.0 WG BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

378 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 Output Signal Combined static error Operating Temperature F. Air Pressure Sensor: Range Output Signal Accuracy 0 to 5 WG 0 to 10 WG 4 20 ma VDC 0.5% full range -40ºF to 175º F 0 to 0.1 WG 0 to 0.25 WG 0 to 0.5 WG 0 to 1 WG 0 to 2 WG 0 to 5 WG 0 to 10 WG 4 20 ma VDC ±1.0% of full scale G. Humidity Sensors: Range 0 to 100% RH Sensing Element Bulk Polymer Output Signal 4 20 ma VDC Accuracy ± 2%RH at 77 F H. Insertion Flow Meters (Equal to Onicon Series F-1200 or FB-1200) Type: Dual turbine. Provide bi-directional where required. Sensing Method Impedance Sensing Accuracy ± 2% of Actual Reading Maximum Operating Pressure 400 PSI Output Signal 4 20 ma I. Pressure to Current Transducer Range Output Signal Accuracy 3 to 15 psig or 3 to 30 psig 4 20 ma VDC ± 1% of full scale (± 0.3 psig) J. Carbon Dioxide: 1. Sensor shall be remote mounted non dispersive infrared carbon dioxide optical diffusion gas cell type with pulsed source and non-free air optical path. Sensing cell shall be provided with thirty (30) inch cable for duct mounting. Sensor shall produce linear analog 0-1 Volt DC, 4-20 MA, and binary adjustable switch point form C outputs. Range shall be parts per million with accuracy of three (3) percent. Sensor shall be mounted in weather tight enclosure with forty-one (41) degree Fahrenheit to 104 degree Fahrenheit operating temperature. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

379 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 K. Control Valves (all control valves shall have electric actuators) Rangeability 40:1 Flow Characteristics Modified. Equal percentage Control Action Normal open or closed as selected Medium Steam, water, glycol Body Type Valves 2 and smaller- screwed ends Valves 2½ and larger flanged Body Material Bronze Body Trim Bronze Stem Stainless Steel Actuator 0-10 VDC Floating or 2 position 24 VAC/120VAC L. Damper Actuators 1. Electric control shall be direct coupled actuators. 2. Damper actuators shall be Brushless DC Motor Technology with stall protection, bi-directional, fail safe spring return, all metal housing, manual override, independently adjustable dual auxiliary switch. a. The actuator assembly shall include the necessary hardware and proper mounting and connection to a standard ½ diameter shaft or damper blade. 3. Actuators shall be designed for mounting directly to the damper shaft without the need for connecting linkages. 4. All actuators having more than 100 lb-in torque output shall have a self-centering damper shaft clamp that guarantees concentric alignment of the actuator s output coupling with the damper shaft. The self-centering clamp shall have a pair of opposed v shaped toothed cradles; each having two rows of teeth to maximize holding strength. A single clamping bolt shall simultaneously drive both cradles into contact with the damper shaft. 5. All actuators having more than a 100 lb-in torque output shall accept a 1 diameter shaft directly, without the need for auxiliary adapters. 6. All actuators shall be designed and manufactured using ISO900 registered procedures, and shall be Listed under Standards UL873 and CSA22.2 No l MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES A. Thermostats 1. Room thermostats shall be of the gradual acting type with adjustable sensitivity. 2. They shall have a bi-metal sensing element capable of responding to a temperature change of one-tenth of one degree. (Provide all thermostats with limit stops to limit adjustments as required.) 3. Thermostats shall be arranged for either horizontal or vertical mounting. 4. In the vertical position thermostat shall fit on a mullion of movable partitions without overlap. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

380 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 5. Mount the thermostat covers with tamper-proof socket head screws. B. Firestats: 1. Provide manual reset, fixed temperature line voltage type with a bi-metal actuated switch. a. Switch shall have adequate rating for required load. C. Electronic Airflow Measurement Stations and Transmitters (At Duct Locations). 1. Each insertion station shall contain an array of velocity sensing elements and straightening vanes. The velocity sensing elements shall be of the RTD or thermistor type. The sensing elements shall be distributed across the duct cross section in a quality to provide accurate readings. The resistance to airflow through the airflow measurement station shall not exceed 0.08 inches water gage at an airflow of 2,000 fpm. Station construction shall be suitable for operation at airflow of up to 5,000 fpm over a temperature range of 40 to 120 degrees F, and accuracy shall be plus or minus 3 percent over a range of 125 to 2,500 fpm scaled to air volume. Each transmitter shall produce a linear, temperature compensated 4 to 40 ma DC, output corresponding to the required velocity pressure measurement. D. Current Sensing Relay: 1. Provide solid-state, adjustable, current operated relay. Provide a relay which changes switch contact state in response to an adjustable set point value of current in the monitored A/C circuit. 2. Adjust the relay switch point so that the relay responds to motor operation under load as an on state and so that the relay responds to an unloaded running motor as an off state. A motor with a broken belt is considered an unloaded motor. 3. Provide for status device for all fans and pumps. E. Fire and Smoke Control Devices PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. Provide all smoke detection devices as required by NFPA Standard 90A and the International Building Code. 3.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT A. Provide a designated project manager who will be responsible for the following: 1. Construct and maintain project schedule 2. On-site coordination with all applicable trades, subcontractors, and other integration vendors 3. Authorized to accept and execute orders or instructions from owner/architect BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

381 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase INSTALLATION 4. Attend project meetings as necessary to avoid conflicts and delays 5. Make necessary field decisions relating to this scope of work 6. Coordination/Single point of contact A. Provide control/power wiring and conduit to connect the automatic temperature control system and all HVAC system components for a complete operational system. 1. Provide wiring in accordance with the NFPA Do not bury or conceal wiring beneath insulation. 3. Locate wiring clear of access doors, accessible ceilings, lighting fixtures, walkways, or any location subject to damage or abrasion. B. Label or code each field wire at each end, and each controller and controlled device. 1. Identification shall be permanent, not subject to fading, flameproof, and approved by the Architect. 2. Permanently mark terminal blocks at wire termination points. 3. Identify each control device with an engraved laminated phenolic nameplate, white on black, lettering not less than 1/8 inch high, on 1 1/2 inch by 1 inch tag and brass interlocked chain secured to the control device. Name shall correspond with identification on the shop drawings. 4. Identify sensors, controllers, relays, either mounted in local or central control panels, or remote mounted with a similar name tag as specified above. Attach to or adjacent to controllers with stainless steel or brass screws or rivets. Adhesives will not be acceptable. Do not attach to removable controller covers. C. Mount strap on sensors using helical screw stainless steel band clamps install strap on thermostats, aquastats and other temperature sensors on new piping only after the pipe surface is cleaned to bright metal. Strap on sensor may be used on piping up to 2 1/2 inch diameter. On pipe three (3) inches and larger pipe wells shall be used. D. Install valves in piping with stems as vertical as possible but in no case less than fortyfive (45) degrees from vertical. For soldered or welded connections, remove valve internals before installation. E. Wire electric valves in accordance with NFPA 70 with not less than two (2) feet of flexible liquidtight connector with watertight bushings at the valve actuator and conduit termination. Brace conduit to the building structure to prevent movement and damage. F. Install pressure and temperature sensors as follows. 1. Locate pressure and temperature sensing points sufficiently downstream from the control device to increase control loop time constant and minimize hunting. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

382 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 2. Locate shut off valves and three (3) valve bypasses as specified and as required to service sensors. 3. Locate sensors where accessible for maintenance and replacement. 4. Do not cover or conceal sensors with insulation. G. Locate each controller inside local field cabinets with instrumentation, pressure gauges, voltmeters or milliammeters to show, at the controller location, the condition of input power supply, input controller signal, and branch line signal. Indicators shall be permanently mounted. H. Provide wells for all sensors and indicators measuring temperatures in pressure vessels and piping. 1. Wells shall be stainless steel or bronze to match media requirements. 2. Verify working pressure of each sensor well installed. 3. Do not install wells in extension couplings. 4. Where pipe diameters are smaller than the well length, provide wells at piping elbow or tees to affect flow across the entire well area. 5. Wells may face upstream or downstream. 6. Install pipe wells above the horizontal to retain liquid heat transfer fluid in the well during assembly and maintenance 7. If pipe wells restrict cross sectional pipe area to less than seventy (70) percent free area, provide pipe increases at the well not less than 150 percent pipe diameter. I. Dampers 1. Mount dampers with the pivot rods in a horizontal position, except where suitable thrust bearings are provided, damper blade pivot rods may be a position other than horizontal. 2. Mount operators outside of the duct or casing, on support plates that are completely outside the insulation and lagging. On casings or ducts handling cold air, install support plates in a manner that will prevent condensation on damper operator or on supports. 3.3 START-UP AND COMMISSIONING A. When installation of the system is complete, calibrate equipment and verify transmission media operation before the system is placed on-line. All testing, calibrating, adjusting and final field tests shall be completed by the manufacturer. Verify that all systems are operable from local controls in the specified failure mode upon panel failure or loss of power. B. Provide any recommendation for system modification in writing to owner. Do not make any system modification, including operating parameters and control settings, without prior approval of owner. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

383 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 C. After manufacturer has completed system start-up and commissioning. Joint commissioning of integrated system segments shall be completed. D. A total of 40 man-hours shall be included in the project for the purpose of project commissioning. 3.4 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND MATERIALS A. Install, connect and wire the items included under this Section. This work includes providing required conduit, wire, fittings, and related wiring accessories. All wiring shall be installed in conduit. B. Electrical work required for the control system shall be performed by and under the direction of the control manufacturer. All electrical work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Division 26, ELECTRICAL of this specification. Use materials specified in Division 26, ELECTRICAL for comparable application. C. Provide 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz power to every BAS DDC Controller panel, HVAC/Mechanical Equipment Controller, PC console, power supply, transformer, annunciator, modems, printers and to other devices as required. The power supplies are to be extended in conduit and wire from normal power circuit breakers. D. Provide status function conduit and wiring for equipment covered under this Section. E. Provide conduit and wiring between the BAS panels and the temperature, humidity, or pressure sensing elements, including low voltage control wiring in conduit. F. Provide conduit and signal wiring between motor starters in motor control centers and high and/or low temperature relay contacts and remote relays in BAS panels located in the vicinity of motor control centers. G. Provide conduit and wiring between the PC workstation, electrical panels, metering instrumentation, indicating devices, miscellaneous alarm points, remotely operated contractors, and BAS panels, as shown on the drawings or as specified. H. All wiring to be compliant to local building code and the NEC. I. Provide electrical wall box and conduit sleeve for all wall mounted devices. 3.5 PERFORMANCE A. Unless stated otherwise, control temperatures within plus or minus 2 F, and humidity within plus or minus 2% of the set point and static pressure within 10% of set point. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

384 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase COMMISSIONING, TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE A. Perform a three-phase commissioning procedure consisting of field I/O calibration and commissioning, system commissioning and integrated system program commissioning. Document all commissioning information on commissioning data sheets which shall be submitted prior to acceptance testing. Commissioning work which requires shutdown of system or deviation from normal function shall be performed when the operation of the system is not required. The commissioning must be coordinated with the owner and construction manager to ensure systems are available when needed. Notify the operating personal in writing of the testing schedule so that authorized personnel from the owner and construction manager are present throughout the commissioning procedure. 1. Prior to system program commissioning, verify that each control panel has been installed according to plans, specifications and approved shop drawings. Test, calibrate and bring on line each control sensor and device. Commissioning to include, but not be limited to: a. Sensor accuracy at 10, 50 and 90% of range. b. Sensor range. c. Verify analog limit and binary alarm reporting. d. Point value reporting. e. Binary alarm and switch settings. f. Actuator ranges. g. Fail safe operation on loss of control signal, electric power, network communications. B. After control devices have been commissioned (i.e. calibrated, tested and signed off), each BMS program shall be put on line and commissioned. The contractor shall, in the presence of the owner and construction manager, demonstrate each programmed sequence of operation and compare the results in writing. In addition, each control loop shall be tested to verify proper response and stable control, within specified accuracy's. System program test results shall be recorded on commissioning data sheets and submitted for record. Any discrepancies between the specification and the actual performance will be immediately rectified and retested. C. After all BMS programs have been commissioned, the contractor shall verify the overall system performance as specified. Tests shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Data communication, both normal and failure modes. 2. Fully loaded system response time. 3. Impact of component failures on system performance and system operation. 4. Time/Date changes. 5. End of month/ end of year operation. 6. Season changeover. 7. Global application programs and point sharing. 8. System backup and reloading. 9. System status displays. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

385 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase Diagnostic functions. 11. Power failure routines. 12. Battery backup. 13. Smoke Control, stair pressurization, stair, vents, in concert with Fire Alarm System testing. 14. Testing of all electrical and HVAC systems with other division of work. D. Submit for approval, a detailed acceptance test procedure designed to demonstrate compliance with contractual requirements. This Acceptance test procedure will take place after the commissioning procedure but before final acceptance, to verify that sensors and control devices maintain specified accuracy's and the system performance does not degrade over time. E. Using the commissioning test data sheets, the contractor shall demonstrate each point. The contractor shall also demonstrate all system functions. The contractor shall demonstrate all points and system functions until all devices and functions meet specification. F. The contractor shall supply all instruments for testing and turn over same to the owner after acceptance testing. 1. All test instruments shall be submitted for approval. 2. Test Instrument Accuracy: Temperature: High Pressure: Low Pressure Humidity: Electrical: ¼ F or ½% full scale, whichever is less. ½ psi or ½% full scale, whichever is less. ½% full scale 2% RH 1/4% full scale G. After the above tests are complete and the system is demonstrated to be functioning as specified, a thirty day performance test period shall begin. If the system performs as specified throughout the test period, requiring only routine maintenance, the system shall be accepted. If the system fails during the test, and cannot be fully corrected within eight hours, the owner may request that performance tests be repeated. 3.7 TRAINING A. The manufacturer shall provide factory trained instructor to give full instruction to designated personnel in the operation of the system installed. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. The manufacturer shall provide all students with a student binder containing product specific training modules for the system installed. All training shall be held during normal working hours of 8:00 am to 4:30 PM weekdays. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

386 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 B. Provide 40 hours of training for Owner's designated operating personnel. Training shall include: 1. Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manuals 2. Walk-through of the job to locate control components 3. Operator workstation and peripherals 4. DDC controller and ASC operation/function 5. Operator control functions including graphic generation and field panel programming 6. Explanation of adjustment, calibration and replacement procedures 7. Student binder with training modules C. Since the Owner may require personnel to have more comprehensive understanding of the hardware and software, additional training must be available from the Manufacturer. If such training is required by the Owner, it will be contracted at a later date. 3.8 TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. The sequences on the drawings describe the general intent of the control systems. Provide all devices, equipment, and wiring as required to perform the sequences described. B. Unless otherwise noted, size all automatic control valves for maximum ten (10) feet water pressure drop at maximum design flow rate. C. See plans for locations of all room thermostats, panels, dampers, valves, and equipment; where such devices are not indicated, however required by the sequences they shall be provided and located in the field by the Architect. D. Division 26 shall provide all detection devices (heat/smoke) as required by NFPA Standard 90A and the International Building and Mechanical Codes. The installation of detection devices and all control/power wiring for smoke detection devices and smoke dampers shall be provided under this section. Detection devices shall provide automatic shutdown of the HVAC systems in accordance with NFPA 90A. E. All temperature, humidity, pressure, and time set points shall be fully adjustable from the BAS. F. Where used to control both comfort heating and cooling, zone thermostatic controls shall be capable of providing a temperature range or dead band of at least 5ºF within which the supply of heating and cooling energy to the zone is shut off or reduced to a minimum. G. Provide all hardware, software, devices, equipment, and wiring as required to interface with the BAS. H. All two (2) position dampers shall be proven open by the use of end switches. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

387 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 I. Refer to input/output summary schedule for additional control items not described in the sequences. Input/output summary are minimum requirements, provide all required points for complete operation of system. END OF SECTION BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

388 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 SECTION AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SCOPE A. The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements and all other Specification Sections apply to the work specified in this section. In the event of conflict between specific requirements of the various documents, the more restrictive, the more extensive (i.e.: more expensive) requirement shall govern. A. This section includes the air distribution systems including those devices distributing the air to the spaces, and those items which collect, filter, control, and convey air. B. The requirements of Division 23, Section Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions shall apply to the work specified under this section. C. Except for duct pressure tests, all testing and balancing of the air distribution systems shall be performed under Division 23, Section Testing and Balancing of the Specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FAN COIL UNITS A. Provide IEC, Trane or Envirotec 4-pipe fan coil units equal to IEC, having capacities as scheduled on the drawings. Fan coil units shall be factory-assembled, horizontal, drawthru type with full access to internal components. Unit shall be complete with water coils, fan(s), motor, belt drive, drain pan, filter and all wiring, piping and controls. B. Unit shall be constructed in accordance with ETL standards. Units shall comply with the minimum requirements of the US product safety standard, UL Factory-installed motors and electric heaters shall be UL approved. Coils shall be tested in accordance with ARI standard 410, latest edition. Each coil shall be factory tested for leakage at 300- psig air pressure with coil submerged in water. C. Construction shall be heavy-gage galvanized steel, lined with 3/4 thick closed cell insulation thermal/acoustical insulation. Supply and return duct connections shall be 1 in. long. Removable side panels shall be provided for access to the fan/motor assembly. A double-sloped drain pan shall be constructed of stainless steel, extending under the full length and width of the coil(s) with a 3/4-in. male nominal pipe thread stainless steel AIR DISTRIBUTION

389 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 drain connection and 1/2-in. male NPT stainless secondary drain connection (cap when not required). The outside surface of the drain pan shall be insulated with 1/8-in. closed cell insulation. D. Belt-driven, double-width fan wheels shall have forward-curved blades and be statically and dynamically balanced. Fan drive shall consist of variable-pitch motor pulley, fixeddiameter blower sheave with keyed shaft, and V-belt. Fans and scrolls shall be of galvanized steel. Bearings are ball bearings, permanently lubricated and sealed for life. Bearings are isolated from the blower housing by rubber mounts set into heavy gage metal support system. The blower housing shall be isolated from the cabinet and motor. E. Standard unit shall be equipped with a 4-row coil for installation in a 2-pipe system and additional rows of coil shall be provided as an option for installation in a 4-pipe system. Coils shall have 1/2-in. copper tubes, aluminum fins bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion and have a working pressure of 250 psig at 200 F. Each coil shall have a manual air vent and sweat connections for copper tubes. F. A double-circuit coil unit installed in a 4-pipe system shall be capable of providing sequenced heating and cooling. G. Fan motors shall be open, drip-proof, single-speed, 60 Hz, 1750 rpm single or 3 phase, suitable for continuous duty at 104 F (40 C). Single-phase motors shall be capacitor start, include automatic reset thermal overload protection and be available in 115volts (60 Hz). Motors shall be resilient base mounted. H. Motors shall be Class B, continuous duty rated and factory wired to unit junction or control box. Motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated and mounted on an adjustable base for belt tensioning and alignment. The motor and drive shall be installed on the same end as the coil connection for ease of service. I. Unit shall be equipped with either a 4-row cooling/1-row hot water heating split-circuit coil, or a 4/2, 6/1, or 6/2 split-circuit coil as required. Unit coil(s) shall be copper fin, copper tube with stainless steel tube and sheets and be equipped with automatic air vent(s). J. A two-inch MERV 7 pleated filter shall be installed in the unit (standard). K. Units shall be equipped with ¾-in. closed cell insulation. L. Unit shall be equipped with 24-v transformer, motor contactor and terminal strip for connection to field or factory provided controller. Coordinate control requirements with building automation and temperature control contractor. M. The thermostat shall feature digital display of ambient temperature and operating mode, single fan speed operation, power and operating mode buttons, continuous fan operation, AIR DISTRIBUTION

390 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 cycling water control valve and 4-pipe automatic changeover/manual changeover with on-auto fan mode button. The thermostat shall be available for field installation. N. Valve packages shall be factory-assembled for field installation. Valve packages shall include 2-way valves with balancing valves, 2 ball valves, circuit setting and a strainer. 2.2 AIR DEVICES A. Provide air devices of the minimum sizes and quantities indicated and of the types specified. Contractor shall carefully study the drawings and the field conditions to ascertain the air device requirements as to suitability, location, air capacity, required accessories, border and finish. Devices shall be selected to provide draft-free air distribution over entire area served and sound rating shall not exceed Noise Criteria (NC) 25. B. Border types shall be compatible with Architectural ceiling type for the room for which the air device is located. All devices shall have plaster frames when installed in plaster or drywall construction. C. Margins shall be as indicated or directed to suit field conditions. D. Provide Titus, Kreuger, Price, Metalaire or Tuttle & Bailey air devices in accordance with the schedule below and on the drawings. E. Air Device Schedule: Device Type Finish Basis of Design Ceiling Supply Diffuser A #26 white Titus/TDC Return Register C #26 white Titus/PAR Exhaust Register D #26 white Titus/PAR-AA 1. Type A: Ceiling diffusers shall be Titus Model TDC (steel) or prior approved equal. These diffusers shall consist of an outer frame assembly of the sizes and mounting types shown on the plans and outlet schedule. A square or rectangular inlet shall be an integral part of the frame assembly and a transition piece shall be available to facilitate attachment of round duct. An inner core assembly consisting of fixed deflection louvers shall be available in one-, two-, three- or four-way horizontal discharge patterns. The inner core assembly must be removable in the field without tools for easy installation, cleaning or damper adjustment. a. The finish shall be #26 white. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315 F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100-hour ASTM B117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering, or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50-inch pound AIR DISTRIBUTION

391 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 force applied. b. Opposed blade volume damper shall not be provided. Throw Reducing Vanes (TRV) must be available to deflect a horizontal discharge airstream from each side of the TDC diffuser into diverging airstreams. c. The manufacturer shall provide published performance data for the diffuser. The diffuser shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard Type C: Perforated ceiling diffusers shall be Titus Model PAR (steel, flush face) or approved equal for return. Diffusers shall have a perforated face with 3/16-inch diameter holes on ¼-inch staggered centers and no less than 51 percent free area. Perforated face shall be steel. The backpan shall be one piece stamped heavy gauge steel of the sizes and mounting types shown on the plans and outlet schedule. The diffuser neck shall have 1 1/8-inch depth for easy duct connection. Diffusers must discharge a uniform horizontal blanket of air into the room and protect ceiling against smudging. Pattern controllers in the supply models shall be mounted on the back of the perforated face and must be field adjustable to allow the discharged air to enter the room in either vertical or one-, two-, three- or fourway horizontal jets. The perforated face must be easily unlatchable from the backpan to facilitate option of the face for pattern controller adjustment. a. The finish shall be #26 white. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315 F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100-hour ASTM B117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50-inch pound force applied. b. Opposed blade volume damper shall not be provided. c. The manufacturer shall provide published performance data for the perforated diffuser. The diffuser shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard Type D: Perforated ceiling diffusers shall be Titus Model PAR-AA (aluminum, flush face) or approved equal for exhaust. Diffusers shall have a perforated face with 3/16-inch diameter holes on ¼-inch staggered centers and no less than 51 percent free area. Perforated face shall be aluminum. The backpan shall be one piece stamped heavy gauge steel of the sizes and mounting types shown on the plans and outlet schedule. The diffuser neck shall have 1 1/8-inch depth for easy duct connection. Diffusers must discharge a uniform horizontal blanket of air into the room and protect ceiling against smudging. Pattern controllers in the supply models shall be mounted on the back of the perforated face and must be field adjustable to allow the discharged air to enter the room in either vertical or one-, two-, three- or four-way horizontal jets. The perforated face must be easily unlatchable from the backpan to facilitate option of the face for pattern controller adjustment. a. The finish shall be #26 white. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, AIR DISTRIBUTION

392 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 baked at 315 F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100-hour ASTM B117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50-inch pound force applied. b. Opposed blade volume damper shall not be provided. c. The manufacturer shall provide published performance data for the perforated diffuser. The diffuser shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard F. Paint the ductwork behind registers with flat black enamel so that bright surface cannot be seen. Properly prime galvanized surface prior to painting. 2.3 FIRE DAMPERS A. Provide where indicated on the plans, fire dampers constructed and tested in accordance with UL Safety Standard 555. Each fire damper shall have 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating, 212 degrees Fahrenheit fusible link, and shall include a UL label in accordance with established UL labeling procedures and shall have Static Rating for HVAC systems that shut down automatically in a fire or smoke emergency or Dynamic Rating for HVAC systems that remain operational during a fire or smoke emergency. Three (3) hour dampers shall be installed where required by wall or floor rating. Damper Manufacturer's literature submitted for approval prior to installation shall include comprehensive performance data developed from testing in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 and shall illustrate pressure drops for all sizes or dampers required at all anticipated air flow rates. Fire dampers shall be equipped for vertical or horizontal installation as required by the locations indicated on the drawings. Fire dampers shall be installed in wall and floor openings utilizing steel sleeves, angles, other materials, and practices required to provide an installation equivalent to that utilized by the manufacturer when dampers were tested at UL. Fire damper installation shall also meet all requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Installation shall be in accordance with the damper manufacturer's instructions. Fire dampers shall be Ruskin, Leader Industries, Prefco, Nailor, ABI or prior approved equal to Ruskin Type IBD, DIBD, FD of the following styles: 1. Low Pressure Rectangular Ducts - Style B. 2. Low Pressure Round Ducts - Style CR. 3. Medium Pressure Rectangular Ducts - Style C. 4. Medium Pressure Round Ducts - Style CR. 5. Medium Pressure Oval Ducts - Style CO. 6. Dampers for grilles, diffusers, registers, etc. - Thinline. B. Fire damper assembly shall include fire damper and damper enclosure wall sleeve complete with duct attachment flanges, as detailed. Provide an access door at each fire damper located so as to permit easy maintenance of damper and fusible link. All fire dampers shall be installed in accordance with NFPA Requirements and the manufacturer's printed instructions. AIR DISTRIBUTION

393 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 C. Submit samples for approval to the Architect of all fire, fire/smoke, and smoke damper assemblies for low pressure and medium pressure duct systems. Dampers shall not be installed prior to receiving written approval of submitted samples. 2.4 DUCTWORK A. General: 1. The Duct Manual as herein referenced shall mean the HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal & Flexible, 3rd Edition, 2005 as published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. 2. Unless noted otherwise, ductwork shall be constructed of prime, first quality galvanized steel of gauges as called for in the Duct Manual. Reinforce all ducts to prevent buckling, breathing, vibrations, or unnecessary noise. Such reinforcing shall be as recommended in Duct Manual, plus any additional reinforcing as required to meet job conditions. Longitudinal and cross joints, elbows, transitions, etc., shall be furnished as specified in Duct Manual, including recommended duct supports to suit job conditions. 3. All uninsulated rectangular ductwork shall be crossbroken on all four (4) sides of each panel section. All vertical and horizontal sheet metal barriers, duct offsets and elbows, as well as the panels of straight sections of ducts, shall be crossbroken. Crossbreaking shall be applied between the standing seams or reinforcing angles. The center of the crossbreak shall be of the required height to assure each panel section being rigid, to prevent vibrations and "breathing". 4. Supply air ductwork from air handling units to the air terminal units shall be "medium pressure" ductwork. Supply ductwork from air terminal units to air devices shall be low pressure ductwork. 5. Outdoor air, return air, relief air and exhaust air ductwork shall be low pressure ductwork. 6. Exposed circular low pressure supply ductwork shall be provided with grip finish and painted. Refer to Division 9 specifications. Color shall be by Architect. 7. Duct cleaning and acceptable level of contaminants allowed in the HVAC system, otherwise known as the Duct Cleanliness Level, shall be equal to Level C - Advanced in accordance with SMACNA Duct Cleanliness for New Construction, 2000 Edition. 8. Support and restrain all ducts in accordance with the Duct Manual and IBC B. Low Pressure Ductwork (0" to 2" Water Gauge): 1. Ductwork shall conform to requirements and details, unless specified or indicated otherwise in the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal & Flexible, 3rd Edition, A copy of the duct manual shall be secured by the Contractor and shall be kept at the project for convenient reference. 2. Concealed circular low pressure supply and exhaust ductwork shall be United McGill low pressure spiral ductwork and fittings, equal to United Uni-seal spiral lockseam duct. 3. Exposed circular low pressure supply ductwork shall be acoustically insulated AIR DISTRIBUTION

394 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 double-wall spiral ductwork and fittings. Double wall duct shall be constructed of a paintable outer shell, a 1" thick layer of fiberglass insulation and an inner metal liner. Insulation shall have a thermal conductivity "K" factor of.27 BTU/hr/sq. ft./ºf or less. Double-wall spiral ductwork shall be United ACOUSTI-k27 spiral lockseam duct, Semco Industries SL95P, Lindab Safe, United Sheet Metal spiral pipe, or approved equal. 4. Flexible duct connections where indicated shall be "Ventglass" duct fabric as manufactured by Ventfabrics, Inc. 5. Low pressure ductwork shall conform to the requirements and details contained in the Duct Manual and shall be constructed to the requirements for two (2) inches water gauge. Construction shall conform to the following: a. Material gauges (galvanized steel) & general construction - Tables 1-5, 1-10 thru 1-13 Seal Class B b. Longitudinal seams - Fig. #1-5, Types L-1, L-3 & L-4 c. Corner Closures - Fig. #1-13 & # 1-14 d. Hangers - Fig. #4-1 & 4-4 & Tables 4-1 & 4-2 e. Radius Elbows - Fig. #2-2, Type RE-1 and RE-3 f. Vaned Elbows (Applied to Square elbows) - Fig. #2-2 Type Re-2 & Figs. #2-3 & #2-4, double thickness vanes only g. Transitions & Offsets - Fig #2-9 h. Branch connections - Fig. #2-8, 45 only i. Volume dampers, up to 12" deep j. Volume dampers, over 12" deep - Fig. #2-14, Figs. A&B w/ventlok #555 quadrant - Fig. #2-15, Fig. A w/ventlok #555 quadrant k. Access doors - Cesco #HADF-10 hinged one (1) side w/ventlok #100 latch, insulated, one (1) inch thick 6. Duct sizes indicated on the drawings are air side sizes. Where duct lining is indicated, increase sheet metal sizes accordingly to compensate for thickness of lining. 7. Seal all transverse joints in all low pressure supply ductwork with mineral impregnated woven fiber tape as manufactured by Hardcast, Inc. AIR DISTRIBUTION

395 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 8. Provide stand-offs on volume dampers installed in all insulated ductwork. 9. Flexible ductwork for connection to air devices shall be Casco Silent Flex II or FlexMaster Type 6B. Flexible duct shall have a minimum R-6 insulation, comply with NFPA Standard 90A and shall be U.L. listed as Class 1 Air Duct & Connector, Standard 181. C. Medium Pressure Ductwork (Over 2" and up to 6" Water Gauge): 1. Medium pressure ductwork consists of rectangular, flat-oval, and circular types as indicated on the drawings. 2. Submit samples of medium pressure ductwork for approval as directed. Samples shall include longitudinal seams, transverse joints and reinforcement and others as requested. No ductwork shall be fabricated until duct construction samples are approved in writing by the Architect. 3. All medium pressure duct systems shall be leak tested in strict conformance with "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual", Tests shall be witnessed by the balance subcontractor as hereinafter specified. 4. Medium pressure ductwork shall conform to the requirements and details contained in the Duct Manual and shall be constructed to the requirements for six (6) inches water gauge. Construction shall conform to the following: a. Reinforcement & Gauge - Tables #1-7, 1-10 thru 1-13 b. Transverse Joints - Figs. #1-4 Type T-21, #1-10, #1-12, #1-14, #1-15, Type T-21, and T-22, #1-16, #3-2 Type RT-1 and 2 c. Longitudinal Joints - Fig. #1-5 Type L-1 and L-3 d. Vanes and Vane Runners e. Branch Connections - Fig. #2-3 - Figs. #2-7 and 2-8 f. Transitions - Figs #2-9 g. Offsets - Figs. #2-9 Type 3 h. Supporting Systems - Figs. #4-16, #4-17, #6-4, and Tables #4-1, #4-2 and #4-3 i. Riser Supports - Fig. #4-6 j. Volume and Floor - High Velocity Air Foil Type, Ultra-Low Leakage AIR DISTRIBUTION

396 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 when closed, Ruskin CD-50 suitable for electronic operator provided under Section k. Supply and Exhaust Fan Isolation Dampers - High Velocity Air Foil Isolation Dampers Type, Ruskin OD102 fan outlet damper with silicone rubber blade seals, stainless steel jamb seals and bearings with integral shaft seals. Damper shall be suitable for electronic operator provided under Section l. Duct Sealants - See Section 1 Basic Duct Construction Duct Sealing Commentary m. Access Doors - CESCO #HADF-10 with cam latches, neoprene gasketing and insulated, one (1) inch thick. n. Acoustical Liner - In conformance w/smacna Standard o. Welded Galvanized - Coated with two (2) coats of corrosion Resistant aluminum paint. 5. Circular Medium Pressure Ductwork shall be as manufactured by United Sheet Metal, Eastern or Semco, and shall consist of spiral pipe and welded fittings. a. Circular duct shall have locked seams so made as to eliminate any leakage under the pressures for which this system has been designed. Longitudinal seam duct shall have fusion welded butt seam. Circular duct shall be manufactured of galvanized steel meeting ASTM A653/A924 by the spiral lockseam method and in the minimum gauges listed: Diameter Minimum Gauge 3" thru 8" 26 Ga. 9" thru 14" 26 Ga. 15" thru 26" 24 Ga. 27" thru 36" 22 Ga. 37" thru 50" 20 Ga. b. All fittings are to have continuous welds along all seams. All divided flow fittings are to be manufactured as separate fittings, not as tap collars welded into spiral duct sections. Fittings and couplings shall be of the following minimum gauges: Diameter Minimum Gauge 3" thru 14" 24 Ga. 15" thru 26" 22 Ga. 27" thru 50" 20 Ga. AIR DISTRIBUTION

397 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 c. All ninety (90) degree tees and forty-five (45) degree laterals, either full size or reducing, shall be conical pattern produced by machine or press forming. The entrance shall be free of weld build-up, burrs or irregularities. Provide tangential tees where indicated and required. d. Elbows in diameters three (3) inches through eight (8) inches shall be two (2) section die-stamped elbows. All other elbows shall be gored construction with all seams continuous-welded. Elbows shall be fabricated to a centerline radius of 1.5 times the cross section diameter. All elbows not die-stamped shall be fabricated according to the following schedule: Elbow Angle Number of Gores Less than thru 60 3 Over 60 5 e. The reduction of divided flow fittings shall be conical spun section in the thirty-six (36) reductions in sizes four (4) inches through twenty-two (22) inches. f. Spun bellmouth connections shall be used at each round take-off from the high pressure plenum. g. Offset fittings shall be constructed so that length of offset is not less than two (2) duct diameters. h. Galvanized areas that have been damaged by welding shall be coated with corrosion resistant aluminum paint, minimum two (2) coats. i. Supports and sealants shall conform with applicable portions of the medium pressure Duct Manual. j. Flexible ductwork shall be as previously specified for low pressure duct systems. 2.5 FANS A. General: 1. Provide fans having a certified rating based on tests performed in accordance with AMCA Bulletins Number 210, 211A and 300. See AMCA Standard 99 "Standard Handbook" for definitions of fan terminology. Arrangement, size and capacity of fans are scheduled on the drawings. 2. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced by the manufacturer and shall be provided with field mounted vibration isolation units as hereinbefore specified. 3. Provide lubrication facilities, such as oil reservoirs, sight glasses, grease and relief fittings, fill and drain plugs, pipe connections, etc. Place in a readily and safely accessible location so that after installation they will perform required function without requiring the dismantling of any parts or stopping equipment. 4. All parts of fans shall be protected against corrosion prior to operation of the fan. 5. Certified performance data including acoustical data shall be submitted for each fan at design conditions. Data shall include published sound power levels based AIR DISTRIBUTION

398 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 on actual test on the fan sizes being furnished, and conducted in accordance with current AMCA standards. Such data is to define Sound Power Levels (PWL), re: watts for each of the eight (8) frequency bands. Sound Power Levels shall not exceed those scheduled. Should additional attenuation be required to achieve the levels specified, it shall be included by the fan manufacturer. Any cost of field modifications necessitated by additional attenuation shall also be included by the fan manufacturer. Fan curves shall be submitted which will depict static pressure, total pressure, brake horsepower, and mechanical efficiency plotted against air volume. Data submitted in tabular form is not acceptable. 6. Motors and drives shall be furnished by the fan manufacturer in accordance with the requirements of Division 23, Sections Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions and Motors. B. Type A Fan: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 AIR DEVICES 1. Fan shall be Loren Cook, Greenheack or Twin City equal to Loren Cook Model Gemini GC direct drive ceiling mounted exhaust fan. 2. Fan wheel housing and integral outlet duct collar shall be injection molded from a specially engineered resin exceeding UL requirements for smoke and heat generation. The outlet duct shall have provision for an aluminum backdraft damper with continuous aluminum hinge rod. The inlet box shall be minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel. Motor shall be isolation mounted to a one piece galvanized stamped steel integral motor mount/inlet. A field wiring compartment with disconnect receptacle shall be standard. To accommodate different ceiling thickness, an adjustable prepunched mounting bracket shall be provided. A white, non-yellowing, high impact styrene injection molded grille shall be provided as standard. Unit shall be designed with provision for field conversion from ceiling to inline. Unit shall be shipped in ISTA Certified Transit Tested Packaging. 3. Wheel shall be centrifugal forward curved type, injection molded of polypropylene resin. Wheel shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard , Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. 4. Motor shall be open drip proof type with permanently lubricated sealed bearings and include impedance or thermal overload protection and disconnect plug. Motor shall be furnished at the specified voltage. 5. Fan shall be manufactured at an ISO 9001 certified facility. Fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 705) and UL listed for Canada (cul 705). 6. Fan shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance. A. Install air devices in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published installation instruction to insure against incorrect air pattern, drafts, and dirt smudging. B. Construct, and install sheet metal duct or plenum connections to air devices in accordance with terminal manufacturer's recommendations. AIR DISTRIBUTION

399 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 C. Make modifications to the duct systems as required to accommodate actual sizes of air devices furnished, e.g., transformations and collar sizes without additional cost. D. Make joints between each devices and its components, connecting duct, or the mounting surface airtight, using gasket or its equivalent. E. Align exposed butt edges of linear diffusers using slots and keys strips or with other concealed means. 3.2 FILTERS A. Protect filter elements and media against contamination from dirt during construction. Thoroughly clean system prior to placing filters in operation. B. After all adjustments and tests are completed and immediately before the filters are accepted for regular operation, restore filter media to "new" condition status. C. Install static pressure pitot tips in duct upstream and downstream of the filter and connect to the draft gauge with tubing. Provide suitable cocks in tubing in a manner that will permit calibrating the draft gauge. Carefully level and adjust gauges. 3.3 DUCTWORK A. Install hangers, supports, and their attachments, generally in conformance with SMACNA standard referred to in this section of the specifications and applicable portions of article "Piping, Conduit and Supports", of Division 23, Section Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions. B. Furnish hangers in accordance with SMACNA standards. C. Neatly erect ducts and plenums of sizes and arrangements shown and detailed and as required to carry out intent of specifications and drawings. Work must meet approval of the Architect in all its parts and details. D. Sizes shown are air side sizes. Where ducts are shown as lined, dimensions shall be increased to reflect that thickness of the lining. E. Install ductwork in such a manner as to meet the recommendations of NFPA Standard 90A. F. Provide each air outlet with a collar adequately stiffened, fastened, and made suitable for securing air device thereto. Make field changes in ductwork, such as those required to accommodate the sizes of factory fabricated equipment actually furnished, i.e., coils, air filters, fans, damper and air terminal units and similar items, without additional cost. Provide duct flanges to match those of connecting factory fabricated equipment. When AIR DISTRIBUTION

400 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 necessary, relocate and modify ductwork to avoid obstructions such as structural members, piping and conduit, in a manner acceptable to the Architect. G. Construct and install all ductwork in accordance with the SMACNA Standards specified. Coordinate the installation of all duct systems with all other trades including plumbing, electrical, sprinkler, ceiling systems, etc. H. All open end return air ducts and open end transfer ducts shall be provided with 1/2" galvanized wire mesh screen. I. Leak Testing of Ductwork: 1. When deemed necessary by the Architect, test low pressure ductwork for leaks by sealing openings and pressurizing system to that static pressure which the system will operate. Use test methods approved by SMACNA and Architect. Seal all joints. Leakage shall not exceed three (3) percent of air flow specified at the system's nominal static pressure. 2. Medium pressure ductwork shall be pressure tested as hereinbefore defined. J. Duct smoke detectors shall be installed where indicated on the mechanical and electrical drawings. Duct smoke detectors shall be installed upstream of the associated smoke damper and within 6'-0" of the damper in as straight a section of ductwork as possible. END OF SECTION AIR DISTRIBUTION

401 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number SECTION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. VFC: Variable frequency controller. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

402 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. Alpha Wire. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Southwire Incorporated. B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S for Type THHN-2- THWN CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. 9. Tyco Electronics. B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. 2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

403 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Exposed Feeders: THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. C. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. B. Each branch circuit shall have an individual neutral conductor. Increasing the neutral conductor size, or super neutral, is not allowed for multiple branch circuits. C. Feeders and branch circuits shall have a ground conductor. D. Install no more than 3 phase wires in any feeder or branch circuit conduit. E. Wire size on 120 Volt, 20 ampere branch circuit home run conductors over 75 feet in length (from closest wiring device at the home run designation to the associated panelboard shown on the electrical drawing sheets), shall be increased to No. 10 AWG (minimum) to limit excessive voltage drop. F. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

404 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number G. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. H. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. I. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. J. Support cables according to Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor. 3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.7 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section "Penetration Firestopping." LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

405 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

406 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

407 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

408 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

409 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

410 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. END OF SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

411 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number SECTION RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes serving communications systems. 2. Section "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. D. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

412 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. 4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Source quality-control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 6. Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. 9. Southwire Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

413 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. 1. Comply with NEMA RN Coating Thickness: inch, minimum. G. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. H. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. J. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel. b. Type: compression. 3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. K. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.2 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

414 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 7. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover. E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. J. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep. K. Gangable boxes are not allowed. L. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. M. Cabinets: RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

415 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the following: a. Mechanical rooms. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB D. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. E. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

416 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Comply with requirements in Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. G. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. Provide support straps intended for this type of installation. Provide support straps intended for this type of installation. H. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. J. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. K. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. L. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. M. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

417 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number N. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. O. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. P. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. Q. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. R. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. S. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. T. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet. 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits. 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

418 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number U. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. V. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. W. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. X. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. Y. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. Z. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. 3.3 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

419 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number SECTION VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Spring isolators. 2. Restrained spring isolators. 3. Channel support systems. 4. Restraint cables. 5. Hanger rod stiffeners. 6. Anchorage bushings and washers. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The IBC: International Building Code. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic-Restraint Loading: 1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: IV. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

420 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device. 2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used. a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements. 3. Restrained-Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints. 2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices. 3. Field-fabricated supports. 4. Seismic-Restraint Details: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices. c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations). 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints. B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency. C. Welding certificates. D. Field quality-control test reports. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

421 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR , and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismicrestraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. E. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corporation. 4. Isolation Technology, Inc. 5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Mason Industries. 7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 8. Vibration Isolation. 9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

422 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Hilti Inc. 5. Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division. 6. Mason Industries. 7. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC. 8. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized -steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods. F. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs. G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices. H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face. I. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter. J. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

423 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number FACTORY FINISHES A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces. C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. 3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints: 1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment. 2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds inch (3.2 mm). 3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall. C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

424 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number D. Drilled-in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. 5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications. 3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice. 3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members. 4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect. 5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

425 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number Verify snubber minimum clearances. 9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. C. Adjust active height of spring isolators. D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. END OF SECTION VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

426 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number SECTION IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels. 7. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1and IEEE C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR and 29 CFR D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

427 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size. B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage. C. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. D. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. F. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener. G. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

428 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size. B. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. C. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, selflaminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. D. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224. E. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener. F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer. G. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. H. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. 2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. B. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, selflaminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

429 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. E. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around conductor it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224. F. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. G. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Labels for Tags: Self-adhesive label, machine-printed with permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by printer manufacturer, sized for attachment to tag. 2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches. D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: 1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches. E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

430 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label. 2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label. C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch. 2.7 CABLE TIES A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

431 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black. C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color: Black. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

432 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. I. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: 1. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. J. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals. B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Emergency Power. 2. Power. 3. UPS. C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded feeder and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

433 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. D. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels. E. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination. F. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations provide self-adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels with the conductor designation. G. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source. H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. I. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Selfadhesive warning labels. 1. Comply with 29 CFR Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Controls with external control power connections. K. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

434 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. c. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Enclosed switches. d. Enclosed circuit breakers. e. Enclosed controllers. END OF SECTION IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

435 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number SECTION LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Indoor occupancy sensors. 2. Emergency UL924 relay. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers and manual light switches. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors. 1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

436 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 5. Lightolier Controls. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 9. RAB Lighting. 10. Sensor Switch, Inc. 11. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 12. Watt Stopper. B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. 3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack. 4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA Mounting: a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door. 6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor. 7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. C. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

437 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. 2.2 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 5. Lightolier Controls. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 9. RAB Lighting. 10. Sensor Switch, Inc. 11. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 12. Watt Stopper. B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F. 3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at 277 V, and 800-W incandescent. 4. "Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.. 5. Sensing Technology: Dual technology. 6. Switch Type: SP. 7. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage. 8. Concealed "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds, and 5, 10, and 20 minutes. 9. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

438 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Lighting Control and Design; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 2. Watt Stopper. B. Description: Normally closed, electrically held relay, arranged for wiring in parallel with manual or automatic switching contacts; complying with UL Coil Rating: 277 V. 2.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 3/4 inch. B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpowerlimited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

439 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors at each sensor. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections : 1. Operational Test: After installing sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations. END OF SECTION LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

440 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number SECTION WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Snap switches. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. WIRING DEVICES

441 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packinglabel warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section. 2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex). WIRING DEVICES

442 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: 1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. c. Pass & Seymour; d. Leviton; TOGGLE SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Single Pole: 1) Cooper; AH ) Hubbell; HBL ) Leviton; ) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1. b. Three Way: 1) Cooper; AH ) Hubbell; HBL ) Leviton; ) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 1-mm- thick, satin-finished, Type 302 stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: 1-mm- thick, satin-finished, Type 302 stainless steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. WIRING DEVICES

443 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number FINISHES A. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: WIRING DEVICES

444 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. 3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: WIRING DEVICES

445 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. B. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES

446 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number SECTION ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nonfusible switches. 2. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NC: Normally closed. B. NO: Normally open. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Current and voltage ratings. 2. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate) ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

447 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Field quality-control reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. D. Manufacturer's field service report. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing circuit breakers. 2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer. B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

448 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number D. Comply with NFPA PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C) COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

449 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." C. Comply with NECA IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

450 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

451 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number SECTION INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. LED lighting fixtures. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BF: Ballast factor. B. CCT: Correlated color temperature. C. CRI: Color-rendering index. D. HID: High-intensity discharge. E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. INTERIOR LIGHTING

452 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number Ballast, including BF. 3. Energy-efficiency data. 4. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. B. Installation instructions. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with NFPA WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for LED Fixtures: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of LED light fixture agrees to repair or replace components of light fixture that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for LED Fixtures: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years INTERIOR LIGHTING

453 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work are as indicated on Drawings. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. C. LED Fixtures: Comply with UL Heat sink cooling without fans, pumps or moving parts. D. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. E. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. G. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. H. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: INTERIOR LIGHTING

454 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires. d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. e. CCT and CRI for all luminaires. 2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts: 1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level control is indicated. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C and IEEE C , Category A or better. 7. Operating Frequency: 42 khz or higher. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 9. BF: 0.88 or higher. 10. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 11. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. B. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts. C. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T8 Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following: 1. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 2.4 EXIT SIGNS A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, two for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp life. 2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2.5 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220 mm), 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. INTERIOR LIGHTING

455 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches (610 mm), 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. 2.1 DRIVERS/POWER SUPPLYS FOR LED A. Description: Self-contained power supply that has outputs matched to the electrical characteristics of the LED or array of LEDs. 1. Driver compartment meets or exceeds IEC standard IP Located inside the housing with serviceable access for replacement. 3. Housing or lenses constructed of polymers; must be UV stabilized. 4. Must be current-regulated (deliver a consistent current over a range of load voltages. 5. Designed for multi-current input operation. 6. Must operate between -20 C and 50 C. 7. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C and IEEE C , Category A or better. 8. Operating Frequency: 120 Hz or higher. 9. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher. 10. Dimming capability as described on drawings. 2.1 LEDs A. LED Module/Array: Designed for multi-current input operation. B. Light Quality: CRI 65 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K. C. Minimum Lamp Life: L70 at 50,000 hours average rated life. 2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm). E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm). F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. INTERIOR LIGHTING

456 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures: 1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall. C. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element. 1. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture for fixtures weighing less than 10 lbs. Install at least two independent support rods or wires from structure to a tab on lighting fixture for fixtures weighing more than 10 lbs but less than 56 lbs. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. D. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure. E. Connect wiring according to Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. INTERIOR LIGHTING

457 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number STARTUP SERVICE A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark. 1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect. END OF SECTION INTERIOR LIGHTING

458 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number SECTION PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems. 2. Section "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For pathway racks, enclosures, cabinets, equipment racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer. PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

459 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which certification is based and their installation requirements. 4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Source quality-control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Alpha Wire Company. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 5. Electri-Flex Company. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 7. Picoma Industries; Subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 8. Republic Conduit. 9. Robroy Industries. 10. Southwire Company. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 13. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company. B. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-B. C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL F. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

460 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 6. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 7. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 8. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 9. Molex; Woodhead Brand. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: 1. Comply with TIA-569-B. C. Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. F. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep. G. Gangable boxes are not allowed. H. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

461 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION A. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC Pathway locations include the following: a. Mechanical rooms. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: EMT. 6. Pathways for Concealed General-Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1, except use NEMA 250 Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. B. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber cables is 1 inch. C. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB D. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation. PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

462 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number D. Comply with requirements in Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. I. Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. J. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. K. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. L. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length. M. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lbtensile strength. Leave at least 12 inchesof slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use. N. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. O. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

463 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number P. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. Q. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings. R. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet. 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits. 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. S. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. T. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. U. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. V. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. W. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

464 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number X. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. 3.3 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. PROTECTION B. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

465 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number SECTION PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems. 2. Section "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving communications systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

466 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For pathway racks, enclosures, cabinets, and equipment racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Source quality-control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Alpha Wire Company. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 5. Electri-Flex Company. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 7. Picoma Industries; Subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 8. Republic Conduit. 9. Robroy Industries 10. Southwire Company. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 13. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company. B. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-B. C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL F. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

467 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number G. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. I. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 2.2 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 6. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 7. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 8. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 9. Molex, Woodhead Brand 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: 1. Comply with TIA-569-B. 2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. F. Device Box Dimensions: 4-inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep. G. Gangable boxes are not allowed. H. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

468 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. J. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION A. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Pathway locations include the following: a. Mechanical rooms. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric-Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: EMT. 7. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications-Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT. 8. Pathways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT. 9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. B. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber cables is 1 inch. C. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location. PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

469 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB D. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Comply with requirements in Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications wiring conduits for which only two 90-degree bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. J. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

470 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number /4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. K. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. L. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. M. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings. N. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC[ and EMT] conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet. 2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits. 3. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. O. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. P. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

471 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number Q. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. R. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. 3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electronic Safety and Security Pathways and Cabling." 3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

472 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number SECTION DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 2. Notification appliances. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. LED: Light-emitting diode. B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

473 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals" Chapter in NFPA Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits. 3. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. 4. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits. C. General Submittal Requirements: 1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect. 2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction and include the following: DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

474 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA Provide documents according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter. 3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the same name and include the following: a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals. 5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit. B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Device address list. 3. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level III technician. C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated: DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

475 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written permission SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building. B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnected fire-alarm equipment and wiring. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Existing Edwards System Technology (EST3) system. B. The existing fire alarm control panel shall remain and be expanded as required to accommodate the new devices. All functions shall remain the same. 2.2 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 2. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 2.3 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

476 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a singlemounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. B. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output. C. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output. D. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dba, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol. E. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens. 1. Rated Light Output: a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 4. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 5. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment. B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections. 1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building. 2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station. 3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control and monitoring equipment as necessary to extend existing control and monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system. C. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

477 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number D. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling. E. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled. 3.1 PROGRAMMING A. Coordinate room numbering with the Owner prior to programming the fire alarm system. Room numbers are not necessarily the ones shown on contract documents. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.3 GROUNDING A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

478 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 MPS Project Number a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter. b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components. 2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances. F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system. END OF SECTION DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

479 CSB 7th Floor Orthopaedic Surgery Office Renovation Phase 2 Appendix Index 1. Annual Fire Pump Test Report MUSC (Clinical Science Building), (8 pages), dated CSI Form 1.5C Substitution Request Form (During Bid Period) (1 page) 3. Contractor Statement of Responsibility (1 page) 4. Sample Digital Data Licensing Agreement (AIA C ) with additional requirements (including processing fee) 5. Application for MUSC Construction Identification Badge (1 page) 6. Report of Pre-Renovation Limited Asbestos Assessment, dated Prepared by GEL Engineering, LLC. (Not included but, available upon request) 7. (Phase 1) Above Ceiling Fireproofing Repair Scope (to be completed by Phase 2 General Contractor),Prepared by Phase 1 General Contractor, dated Page 1 of 1

480

481

482

483

484

485

486

487